Home

DLHD High Definition Digital Light User Manual

image

Contents

1. csse 193 Sinewave Vertical w Z Axis Wobbulation cece cece cece e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneas 193 DLHD Digital Light User Manual xvii A Cede va het LE MEL tm A E Mat MUS 194 Horizontal c rcr mE 194 elear isie Nislaomc E mM 195 Spherical Mapping OUESICIG usaste tds 195 Spherical Mapping MASIA Ve a O Dash un 195 Modifier Parameter Adjustments ssssssssssssesseese eee eee nnns 195 TEXUrE MIKINO e Un Er A we enemas Anu unleashed RT 197 Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular sesssssseeee mens 198 Texture Ripple Circular nta Iran 198 Texture Ripple Horizontal 3 35 a 199 Texture RIDpIe Vertical 5 i etd audes vtr id fend arab ER pd tnim daa 199 eX GUE SITE Aa a E EE A T EET ASERTA 200 ANE VCO rM C RENE M 201 Transparente WIDE a 202 ZOOM BUT torio ind iio 203 Chapter 14 Synchronizing Content After designating a master fixture you can synchronize the content of other DLHD Axon HD Axon DL 3 or DL 2 fixtures to any Graphic Object on the master in terms of playback time rotation or both Network Synchronization Overview e eese eene nnnn nena nnn nnn nnn 205 Network Synchronization Requirements coerente 205 Network Synchronization Capabilities eessssssss nnn 206 Programming Synchronization eeee eee eeenee nena nnnm a nnnm nnn 206 Sync To Para i a eR T E o o
2. marron phase bleu neutre vert jaune terre D brancher le courant avant de changer les lampes ou d effectuer des r parations Cet quipement doit tre uniquement utilis dans des endroits secs Ne pas l exposer la pluie ou l humidit e A l int rieur de l quipement il n y a pas de pi ces remplacables par l utilisateur Confiez l entretien un personnel qualifi Equipement de Classe I Cet quipement doit tre mis a la terre 292 DLHD Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX C oafety Information Anhang C Wichtige Hinuieise F r Ihre Sicherheit Warnung Zum Schutz Vor Brandgefahr Dieses Gerat darf nur an eine Zweigleitung mit einem berlastungsschutz von h chstens 20 A angeschlossen werden Warnung Zum Schutz Gegen Gefahrliche Korperstrome Wenn dieses Ger t ohne einen Netzkabelstecker erhalten wurde ist der entsprechende Netzkabelstecker entsprechend dem folgenden Code anzubringen Braun Unter Spannung stehend Blau Neutral Gr n Gelb Erde Vor dem Austauschen von Lampen oder vor Wartungsarbeiten stets den Netzstecker ziehen Diese Ger te sind nur zum Einbau in trockenen Lagen bestimmt und m ssen vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit gesch tzt werden Servicearbeiten sollten nur von Fachpersonal ausgef hrt werden Das Gerat enth lt keine wartungsbed rftigen Teile e Dieses Ger t geh rt zur Klasse I Dieses Ger t mu geerdet werden DLHD Digital Lig
3. 0027_solo_b_outmpg 3 User Objects E 004_alphia_roll_4 mpg Stock Media E 004_mary mpg E Stock Objects OO5_breakdown_solo mpg oo C32 CH FE co NE at ot 0 JB DL Three 3 2 005 the end mpg User Media E 005_verzebreak mpa 5 User Objects E 006_piant_ mpg Stock Media 2 007_chorus_3 mpg Stock Objects E 007_kindacool mpg EH B DL 2 Four 4 013 roll sumbols mpa MI Avon One E E 014_sprocket_50 mpg WM Axon Two 7 E 015_verse_1 mpg 42 822 KB 720 480 jn a E 016_verse_1001 mpg 67 992 KB 720 480 3 Q al Conficrslien 2 0170 Fina mpg 268 600 KB 720 480 E 17 alpha roll Z mpg 73 728 KB F20 480 E 01 8kmetropolis main mpg 133 35 KB F20 480 E 018 chorus_solo mpg 137 422 KB 20 480 E 013 chorus mpg 28 002 KB F20 480 4 NN nreenmazsh mnn F 307 KR Fen AAN 75 Files Disk Free Space 270 77 GB Client IP 169 254 19 61 SM wo cO cg c E CO Pi Double clicking on the highlighted file will bring up another dialog describing the identified file error 001 Ichoruscars mpg E EJE HIGH END SYSTEMS sequence end cade missing monte not I fame only DLHD Digital Light User Manual 225 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Archiving User Content An Archive lmage is a compressed file used to store media files folders and object files along with valid identification DMX values This Content Archive is used to backup
4. data complement data dat positive complement positive E Erf data true data true Male XLR Connector Female XLR Connector This data line is not used by the fixture but allows data to pass through the fixture Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 Data Pin 3 Data Pin 4 Secondary data Pin 5 Secondary data Terminator 5 pin male XLR connector with a 120 Ohm terminating resistor fitted between pins 2 and 3 288 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table This table lists the MSpeed motor movement times and their corresponding DMX controller values If you have a numeric type DMX controller use the Value Decimal dec column If you have a fader type DMX controller use the Value Percentage column If your DMX controller allows you to program hex values use the Value hex column 0 17 253 99 FD 09 252 99 FC 021 251 98 FB 025 250 98 FA 029 249 98 F9 047 246 96 F6 055 245 96 F5 063 244 96 F4 266 280 90 E6 286 200 90 E5 307 228 89 E4 329 227 89 ES 352 228 89 E2 E 4 78 221 87 DD 506 220 86 DC E RN 85 DB EAS 939 207 81 81 79 4761 189 74 BD 1814 188 74 BO 1979 185 73 B9 D2 D1 DA 3 D3 D2 2 Dt DO CE CD Mosa CE CD CC 2151 182 71 B6 24 54 25 17 25 80 26 45 27 10 27 76 29 11 29 80 31 19 31 90 34 08
5. CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Powering On the Fixture WARNING This equipment is designed for connection to a branch circuit having a maximum overload protection of 20 A CAUTION Do not power on the fixture until verifying that the line cord cap is suitable for the power source in your location For more information see Attaching a Power Cord Cap on page 7 Disengage Pan and Tilt locks before operating the fixture For more information see Pan and Tilt Locking on page 7 To power on the DL 3 fixture simply connect it to an appropriately rated power source CAUTION Always isolate DL 3 fixtures from generators with a UPS or good quality power conditioner to prevent damage occurring to the integrated media server and projector housed in the DL 3 from generator drop outs and sharp voltage and frequency fluctuations Homing the Fixture When the DLHD fixture is connected to an appropriately rated power source it automatically begins a homing procedure to verify that the major functions of the fixture and its internal projector are oriented properly Shortcut Holding down the inner most i e middle two menu tab buttons for more than two seconds will home the unit The DLHD Menu Display Panel The DLHD display panel gives access to the fixture s onboard menu system Chapter 3 The Digital Light Menu System describes the menu system configuration options in detail NOTE Most configuration features are also avail
6. DUHD High Definition Digital Light User Manual O Barco Lighting Systems 2014 All Rights Reserved Information and specifications in this document are subject to change without notice High End Systems Inc assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this manual Trademarks used in this text High End Systems and Wholehog are registered trademarks and Collage Collage Generator Hog iPC the High End Systems globe logo and the Hog logo are trademarks of High End Systems Inc or High End Systems Europe Ltd Belden is a registered trademark of Belden Inc Microsoft DirectX and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Super HAD and Sony are registered trademarks or trademarks of Sony Corporation in the United States and or other countries Art Net is a registered trademark of Artistic License Corporation Lightwave 3 D is a registered trademark of Newtek Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products High End Systems disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names owned by others HIGH END SYSTEMS D a Barco company DLHD Digital Light User Manual Software Release Version 1 0 2 July 2014 Contacting High End Systems Sales Department Customer Service World Wide Web Patents High
7. Scrubbing displays the selected frame of the composite output of the media server While scrubbing the In Frame the frame selected by the In Frame coarse and fine channels will be displayed Likewise scrubbing the Out Frame will display the frame selected by the Out Frame coarse and fine channels When the with statistics option is selected the composite output includes text data related to the selected frame Remember that the In Frame and Out Frame parameters are defined as a DMX value mapped to the percentage of the media file length not a specific frame DLHD Digital Light User Manual 67 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content NOTE If the Global Control Mode parameter 255 a DMX value of 1 3 for the Global Control parameter provides an alternate font color to enhance statistics readability Playback Speed The Playback Speed parameter controls the speed of the selected media file s Playback Mode The Playback Speed for a media file is used whenever the Playback Mode Parameter s DMX value IS assigned to any Play Forward option Default DMX Value 128 Playback at normal speed A DMX value of 0 or 128 50 plays back media files at the original recorded speed DMX values from 1 to 127 plays the media file back at an increasing speed from slowest to the original recorded speed Values from 129 255 set playback speed from faster than normal to fastest speed NOTE DMX Values 1 127 utilize frame blending to provide a
8. Te Ee ie Scale Scale _ Vertical Horizontale Full Vercu Horizontai Fua Filo Hama Recinnglevispz obj Elasticity _ Enable Elastic Distortion Drew Wrafrnmes Vesta 4 Viraframe 4 Vere Fons Warp Cutpes Chieckoronrd Forme Chutput T Checkerboaid Of Undo Redo Undo Redo LI Warp Oti Free Space 11855 GB Chant F 71071004 Display Panel Editing Panel 244 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Manipulating the Mesh Display Once a warp mesh has been selected or a new warp created you can use the mouse to Orient the mesh shape within the viewing area of the screen Move the scroll wheel of the mouse to zoom in and out on the display area Hold down the SHIFT key and move the scroll wheel to position the display up and down Hold down the CNTR key and move the scroll wheel to position the display right and left Select one or more control points by holding down the left mouse button and dragging over the points you want to manipulate The selection will Latch to the control point De select the point when you are finished editing it using the Right Mouse Button e Remove portions of the grid by right clicking on an individual triangle portion of the mesh Editing Fields This section describes the editing fields from the left panel of the Warp Editor screen in detail Geometry Editing Fields Several primitive shapes i
9. This screen displays the current versions of the fixture s configuration components You can compare these to the latest versions available on the DLHD support page at www highend com Software Version and Firmware Version fields display the current versions loaded on this fixture Unique ID is a factory assigned ID for the media server Fixture Name field displays a name you assign Lamp Hours Fixture Hours Software Version Firmware Version Windows XPe Pan Encd Version Tilt Encd Version Unique ID Fixture Name IP Address 644 Reset JE 1719 Reset FE e gi i gis fi HE k 200237 El 15416 jg 229 10 El Hie 92902AA1 F DL3 one HE PA m ea am ee ee e H eco 169 254 153 131 A in the Content Management Application for easy reference in developing your show I P Address is assigned to that unit by the router or Auto IP 34 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Info_Status Tab This screen displays status errors and warnings on items including e Temperature e Filter life e Lamp life USB and Camera Communication USB Security For more detailed information see Chapter 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Info Harduiare Tab This screen identifies the version of each of the fixture s hardware components DLHD Digital Light User Manual 35 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Test Tab Motion
10. Ultra Long Zoom Lens Throw Ratio 4 3 6 0 1 optional accessory Wide Angle Zoom Lens Throw Ratio 1 3 1 8 1 optional accessory 286 DLHD Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DLHD Specifications Operation Pan 400 Tilt 240 Movement Accuracy Pan and Tilt from the same direction to the programmed point within approximately 01 Control Options DMX512 Art Net Minimum Focus Distance 1 4 meters 4 6 ft Scanning Frequency H sync 15 100 KHz V sync 50 100 Hz Compliances CE CSA ETL nvironmental Ambient Operating Temperature Range 5 40 C 40 104 F Humidity 2096 8096 non condensing Cables and Connectors Video Connectors e SDI In and Out Peripheral Netuiork Connectors e 2 USB ports e Ethernet DLHD Digital Light User Manual 287 APPENDIX A DLHD Specifications DMX and RS 485 Projector Link Cables Belden 9841 or equivalent meets specifications for EIA RS 485 applications with the following characteristics Two 4 conductor twisted pairs plus a shield Maximum capacitance between conductors 30 pF ft Maximum capacitance between conductor and shield 55 pF ft Maximum resistance 20 Ohm 100 ft Nominal impedance 100 140 Ohm Connectors Two 5 pin male and female XLR connectors Common cable shield Grounding lug inside XLR shell positive positive Common negative data true unu cable shield data negative negative complement negative
11. 100 maximum rotation Values below the midpoint rotate counterclockwise to O maximum rotation Modifier 3 Sets the rotation speed from a DMX value of 0 static to 255 100 maximum Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 81 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 128 174 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Lens Grid M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 91 This effect lets you view the image through a grid of virtual convex lenses You can adjust the number magnification and edge shading of the lenses over the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the edge shading Modifier 3 Controls the number of the lens from DMX values of 0 many to 255 100 single lens Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 12 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 112 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 33 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 175 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Magnifying Lens Y Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 36 This effect applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a virtual convex lens effect over a portion of the image You can adjust the siz
12. Curve Shape Scene Change Detect transparency effect Scale RGB Scale Alpha aaa 101 Yxy Luminance Scaling adjusts brightness Scale Scale X Scale y independent of color values Luminance Prerotation Translation sets image in virtual 3 102 D space for rotation Translate X Translate Y Translate Z Rotation Scaling Position VIUA MIS posa MSpeed MSpeed MSpeed Edge Detect2Color Mod1 Sample distance i B Sample Edge Threshold Detected Edge Mod2 Edge threshold comparison Mod3 Discs Compare Detected edge scaler 105 Digital Mspeed 2 Mod1 keystone speed Keystone Framing Not Mod2 framing speed Mods not used Speed Speed Used Sepia Tones Mod1 fades from original Color Fade to Not 106 image color to sepia tones Sepia Saturation Used Mod2 saturation Mod3 not used p Red Tones Mod1 fades from original image 107 color to red tones Mod2 saturation Mod3 DIOT rede IG Saturation nO Red Used not used Gray Maker Mod1 compresses colors to Compress Not 108 shades of gray Mod2 constrast Color to Gray Contrast Used Mod3 not used Gray Maker2 Always gray Mod1 E Not brightness Mod2 contrast Mod3 not used PAJARRE OMAR Used Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 Reduces Color Not Black amp White Mod1 comparison Mod2 l Not Not Fire Gradient Mod1 fade from original image i E Fade Image to Not Not DLHD Digital Light User Manual 59 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions 113 Negat
13. File Tab The File screen displays information about o Content z the currently selected content file Use this User Media x screen to preview content both still User Objects E i i Stock Media images and movies Biti When you select the File tab the file plays in Boss Sie hee ES j the window to the left The bottom right 001 CircieBalis emv Tesi window displays content folders and 004 SwirlStar2 mwv s highlights the current file location 016 109 1024res j 2 017 137 1024res I You can scroll through the Content folders r 018 209 1024res d i and the files inside each folder to preview DMX Value 4 Size 17517265 bytes E any content file DLHD Digital Light User Manual 33 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Info Tab The Info tab displays current fixture information such as hardware and software versions sensor status total fixture and lamp hours and DMX errors You can also reset Lamp and Fixture hours Info Hours The Hours tab displays the Lamp and Fixture hours of operation since the last reset Clicking on the Reset button resets the associated hours to zero Lamp hours should be reset to zero whenever a lamp is replaced Fixture Hours information is often used to track fixture hours for a show or a rental period The number field displays the number of hours the fixture has been operating since the last reset Pressing the Fixture Hours Reset returns the value to O Info Version Screen
14. HIGH END SYSTEMS IP Address Al Servers 6 servers E B DL 3 One 1 B DL 3 One 169 254 153 131 2002412 DL3 Ed Jl DL 3 Two 2 B DL 3 Two 169 254 11 144 2002412 DL3 Ee All Axon One 10 M10 Axon One 169 254 150 81 2002412 Axon qa E Mu HH Aon Two 169 254 179 247 2002412 Bain DN e Fou CE M12 Axon Three 169 254 249 89 2002412 Axon IMAZ Axon Four 169 254 122 38 2002412 Axon i 3 All Configuration Refresh Mire Entent Delete onteni reste konten GHI Dep at tanten archive Upgrade Software Bka cunmman Efejtoorllejs tel lag Identity 4 Right click anywhere in the CMA Window or use the Server s pull down menu to select Upgrade Software The Upgrade Wizard will prompt you to browse to the location where you saved a copy of latest version 5 After locating the upgrade file press Next The Upgrade Wizard displays a list of all HIGH END SYSTEMS Choose the servers to upgrade servers connected to the p IP Address fixture network 15 3 Two 169 254 11 144 2002412 DL3 ODL30n8 169 254 153 131 2 0 0 2412 DL3 6 Click in the box to the left of the server name to select a server s for upgrading 7 Click Next to continue upgrade The server will reboot after upgrading the software Select All Clear All 232 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Server Configuration The CMA lets you remotely view and
15. Increases green color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum green saturation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 56 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 122 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 137 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Adde All Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 5 This effect adds color to all pixels including black using an alternate RGB color algorithm Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 ncreases blue color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation RGB Add to Non black Pixels W Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 6 This effect adds color to all pixels except black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 ncreases blue color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 1
16. Two mounting brackets One safety cable e Documentation CD that contains CMA application User Manual in pdf format Fixture software Recovery software image High End Systems assumes no responsibility for products that are damaged during transport Return a product for repair in its road case Before sending anything to the factory call your High End Systems dealer distributor for a Return Material Authorization RMA number The factory cannot accept any goods shipped without an RMA number DLHD Digital Light User Manual 5 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Hardware Components Connection Ports The DL 3 fixture s back panel provides ports for 5 pin DMX Data In and Data Out see Linking DLHD Fixtures on page 11 for more information Ethernet to connect to other DL 3 fixtures and your computer running the Content Management Application CMA software on a fixture link see Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link on page 11 Two USB ports for connecting peripheral drives to assist with troubleshooting e SDI conections for video input output Serial Digital Interface options for input from the internal camera to the media server and output to another DL 3 fixture or other external video output device not available in DL 3F model Link LED indicates hardware connection via Ethernet Receive LED indicates DMX data coming in Transmit LED indicates DMX data going out Activity LED ind
17. an image s component color values Color to Alpha Inverted varies the LZ Red to Inverted Green Inverted Blue transparency level of the inverted color values alpha to alpha to alpha 51 Texture Mixing crossfades between the current Selects Source Selects Source Crossfade image and another graphic object texture Texture Effect Level Textures 52 Image Scale and Rotate Scales and rotates the E Selects Sets Rotation media file texture applied to a 3 D object 9 Rotation Angle Speed 53 Film Roll scrolls the media file texture Horizontal roll Vertical roll Scales horizontally or vertically speed speed Image Pixelate divides the image into rectangles using Sets amount of Scales Scales 94 i it uj A s the center pixel color of each box as it s color Pixelation horizontally vertically 82 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions DMX Adjustments Value Feci O Modifier Modifier2 Wodifer3 Faux LED divides the image into a grid of l Color 56 Faux Tile divides the image into square tiles Tile Size Spacing EO peaking Horizontal Vertical Fuzz 87 Fuze rates a mutiimage plundiig eod 58 Drop Shadow creates a scalable drop shadow Horizontal Vertical Shadow behind the graphic object shadow size shadow size opacity 59 Zoom Blur zooms into a position on the Horizontal Vertical Zoom image with a multi image blurring effect position center position center in and out Chroma Shift shifts the red blue
18. screen and at another time the projector is being used to illuminate a complex form the warp would be different but the content programming will be the same To achieve this you use the warp editor to generate two different warp files One file is used for the flat screen and one file for the complex surface Each of these files would have a unique DMX address associated with it that you can recall via a control board DLHD Digital Light User Manual 243 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Warp Editing Screen User Warps appears in the All Servers view of the CMA along with other content The number of existing User Warps appears in the lower left of the CMA window When the User Warps file is selected a popup will display a list of user warps already created To open the Warp Editor Right click on the User Warps file in the Content list for the selected server and select Warp Editor or select Warp Editor from the 3D Warps drop down menu at the top of the CMA Window The selected or new warp will appear in the center panel The panel on the right of the screen displays the warp editing fields E HIGH END SYSTEMS 15 Al Sores 6 servers El um AA 1 70 0 B ceccum m 4j M Lobo X HB EC user Media I Liner Obiects O User Wann Persgscinne Camera i 3 Sinck Moda C3 Stock Objet Centre ul operabona AM Aen Ta 37 Figure Canira A AHD TG 100 C AI Canbqumban Rolnbon De oo on on 2 xr x Ye Lyf 2 2 Senko
19. wobbulating object very well The table below describes the interaction between an Effect Mode parameter and its three associated Modifier parameters You can find a detailed description and example of each option in Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions on page 107 NOTE Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Effect Mode 2 and 3 Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 II NANA M 3 OMY Ada ANonbackPuels Oyan Magoma low 4 poaa APs Rej Gem Bw 8 PGBA 2 APs Red Green Be 6 ROBAGLAlNODDRPRS Red Green Bue AGBSwapiosAG Redo Blue Greento Red Blue to Green 9 Solazo tinents acolor value lt DMXvaue Red Gren Bue _10 lazo Zines acolorit value gt OMX vue Red Omen Bue T Solarize 3 sets color io Oit value lt DMXvalue Red Green Bue T2 Soliz 4sets color io Oit value gt DMX value Red Green Bue 13 DotP and DotPandResample DotPandResample Red Green Be EA Cycle cycles colors with DMX value Green BI controlling cycle speed ue e 15 All or Nothing sets color values gt mod value G B 255 and all other color values 0 iin ES DLHD Digital Light User Manual 55
20. 00 00 0 Latitude Deg Start 65 00End 115 00 Longitude Deg Start 75 00End 105 00 Note Once you click New the Curved Geometry options cannot be changed unless you click Reset and start a new Sphere mesh 246 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Horizontal Cylinder When you select the Horizontal shape you can horiz ee set the following Select Inside Surface if you want to display the For Curved Geometries _ Inside Surface ibd t 0 0 0 0 0 0 sphere as a concave surface Centre x y z Latitude Deg Start 0 End iso 7 You can choose the x y and z coordinates as the cylinder s centerpoint Define the Latitude to choose a portion of the cylinder Horizontal Cylinder default geometry Horizontal Cylinder Centre x y Z 1 1 0 Latitude Deg Start 70 00End 105 00 Note Once you click New the Curved Geometry options cannot be changed unless you click Reset and start a new Cylinder mesh DLHD Digital Light User Manual 247 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Vertical Cylinder When you select the Horizontal shape you can set the following Select Inside Surface if you want to display the sphere as a concave surface You can choose the x y and z coordinates as the cylinder s centerpoint Geometry Vert Cylinder For Curved Geometries Centre x y z Longitude Deg Define the Longitude to choose a portion of the cylind
21. 000 000 000 DOO 128 screen The Offset number at the beginning of a e nese ae machen atl each line indicates the first DMX channel with a 100 097 128 128 210 128 000 123 000 128 000 j j 110 128 000 128 000 128 DOO 128 000 128 000 value displayed on that line Use the scroll bar 120 127 255 255 001 255 005 000 000 255 255 at the left of the offset number to scroll y 130 000 126 000 000 001 000 000 000 000 000 through all the values Refresh Timer Off Snapshot The Refresh Rate is the rate at which DMX is being received by the fixture With Refresh Timer set to On you see the raw DMX values updated instantly When Off is selected you will see a Snapshot button Each time you select Snapshot you see the screen frozen at the current values Select On again to restart automatic refresh 30 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Set Tab Set_Fixture Screen E E The Fixture sub tab provides options for Pan Invert oft E selecting or changing fixture movement Tilt Invert Off LJ dimming the mechanical iris and controlling the Pan Tilt Swap Off Fl LCD display black level and orientation Data Loss Timeout Iris Long E Movement Option Fields Ber ah ul mi l Display Invert Auto z Set the Pan Invert option On to invert the i r z direction of the pan motor Use this option to F3 tory Perales On i E coordinate movements between fixtures facing each other in a horizontal orientati
22. 12 Global Functions Collage Generator engine is no longer taking a single file and stretching it across multiple servers but is instead showing the file as rendered Using Multipane Collage gives you the option to use video files that match the resolution of the display devices exactly For example if you have four 1080p HD projectors using a 4 part Multipane Collage with individual 1080p HD video files the resulting collage resolution will be much higher In standard collage modes a single file is divided by the number of parts in the collage To equal the same resolution in standard collage mode the single file would have to be 4 times larger and it would have a negative impact on server performance The Collage mode expands the Standard Collage modes by additionally allowing blend edges on Top Right Bottom Left and all combinations In Collage Modes the blend edges are no longer prescribed by the positions in the cell layout arrangement Instead each external boundary edge can be set independently The simplest scenario is a 1x1 collage with 4 blended edges These multiple blend options allow for unique technical scenarios or allowing the ability to combine several collage types in a larger installation DLHD Digital Light User Manual 99 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Collage Configuration Selection The Collage Config Selection parameter selects which type of Collage array to use from DMX Values 1 12
23. 19 2008 6 33 21 PM Q light 20 sila E Flow Swirls mpa mpg 22 50 260 KB 800 600 772 30 0 25 73 no 2 19 2008 6 33 27 PM El Flower Fly Though HD mpa mpg 23 39 063 KB 800 600 480 30 0 16 0 no 2 19 2008 6 33 31 PM HES Lithopattems 1 a HES_Lithop attems Z B Foliage And Flowers HD mpg mpg 24 13 672 KB 1024 758 158 30 0 5 60 no 2 19 2008 6 33 32 PM E Gibson Guita HD mpg mpg 25 106 099 KB 1024 768 1105 24 0 46 4 no 2 19 2008 6 33 44 PM HES Logos 23 HES Hi Res 24 E Graf DJ HD mpg mpg 26 45 702 KB 1024 768 624 30 0 20 80 no 2 19 2008 6 33 49 PM 5 Nasa Images 25 Grassy Field Fly By HD mpg mpg 27 32 961 KB 800 600 405 30 0 13 50 no 2 19 2008 6 33 52 PM 23 Blue Pony Digital 2 Green Glass HD mpg mpg 28 67 016 KB 1024 758 732 24 0 30 50 no 2 19 2008 6 34 14 PM O HES Core 2 27 E Hour Glass HD mpa mpg 23 48 827 KB 1440 1024 600 30 0 20 0 no 2 19 2008 6 34 19 PM V Squared Labs 2 Hydro Pump HD mpg mpg 30 44 127 KB 1024 768 482 24 0 20 8 no 2 19 2008 6 34 26 PM o Virtual Life Media 2 Iceberas HD mpg mpg 31 78 124 KB 1024 768 960 30 0 32 0 no 2 19 2008 6 34 34 PM Name of the file This value is editable for User content See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 219 Type indicates the file format extension DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder This value can be auto assigned and edited for User content See Assigning DMX Values to User Content on
24. 341 252 o Pl DOLO Sour fa 3 DL2Fou 10210227 DO 14 0 1588 1 338 6 MM Axor Two 5 E Axon Two 10210229 Amn 1 4 0 1588 150 xo 7 Avon Three 102 102 28 Axon 1 40 1588 259 E MMM Asse Three 7 iJ Al Configuration The example above contains the following information for one or all servers The Fixture ID from 1 255 The Fixture Name you have assigned The IP Address e Model type The DMX Start Channel currently assigned to each server The current lamp hours for each server DLHD Digital Light User Manual 233 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Configuring Columns Select which columns are present by selecting Configure Columns from the Servers menu in the menu bar or by right clicking anywhere in the main pane of the CMA High End Systems Content Management Application File REE i Refresh Once you select Configure Columns you can Fixture Name IP Add DL 3 One 10 2 11 DL 3 Two 10 2 11 DL3Thre 10211 OL 2 Four 10 2 11 Axon One 10 2 11 Ason Two 10 2 11 Ason Three 10 2 11 Axon Four 10 2 11 view a list of all possible columns Choose which columns to view by either checking or Upgrade Software un checking each selection Once you have f Configure Columns selected the columns you want to display click on OK woo CD Es to pi Configure Columns v Available Memory Display Level Projector Focus Value Self Test Video Pattern v CPU Utilization Display
25. 36 33 37 09 37 87 38 65 39 44 9C 9 44v 9C 40 23 41 04 154 60 41 85 4268 152 60 98 4434 150 59 96 C2 w C2 w C2 C2 gt gt O O 0O JN NIDAN BA BY O Po o ol COO wo IS N N AIN O co UJ mes 2528 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 289 APPENDIX B MSpeed Conversion Table 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 8 7 7 5 5 5 4 4 53 3 8550 109 48 6D 8677 108 42 60 69 94 93 92 91 8F 8b 8C 8h 8A 88 87 56 INE 55 54 09 139 55 54 54 53 53 43 42 8795 107 42 6B 9155 104 41 68 9598 102 40 66 97 70 99 39 63 9895 98 38 62 101 49 96 38 60 109 28 90 35 5A 11061 89 35 59 114 63 86 34 56 31 50 76 30 4C 138 82 69 27 45 143 33 66 26 42 35257 60 24 3C_ 176 92 45 18 2 2 N N 17361 44 17 18 17 40 2 2 30 F E B A 29 28 27 26 25 24 195 92 34 13 22 201 28 1F 206 70 21404 24 9 18 21590 28 9 17 22 21968 21 8 15 22151 20 8 14 16 Co 252 68 290 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Appendix C Safety Information WARNI NG For Continued Protection Against Fire this equipment is designed for connection to branch circuit with a maximum overload protection of 20 A AN WARNI NG For Continued Protection Against Electric Shock e f this equipment was received without a line cord p
26. 64 25 no adjustment Adjusting toward O compresses the grid toward the vertical center Values above the midrange stretch the grid toward the edges of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 When the Spherical Mapping effect is selected in a Global Effect parameter anda Graphic Effect parameter s DMX value 254 the Graphic Effect Modifier parameters make the following Spherical Mapping adjustments Modifier 1 Corrects the vertical bend A value of 0 no adjustment Values below the midpoint bend the horizontal lines toward the equator to a maximum at 255 Modifier 2 Adjusts the center of the vertical bend A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward 0 moves the bend center down to the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the bend center up to the top of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the center of the horizontal bend A DMX value of 64 25 no adjustment Adjusting toward O bends the vertical grid lines toward the center of the output Values above the midrange bends the lines away from the vertical center to a maximum at 255 100 TIP Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to
27. 9 IEA A e Co A 9 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Linking DLL ARCO Suar 11 Setting p an Ethernet Fixture Lino aee eoa debba rax wx Yeates odes 11 LENKIN CoOntAgQUFa o RE ECOL ias 11 POWERING ObJdcTe FAS o la Eus vise E cane 13 FORMING CNG FIXING incest dci qe CM De pta deines Dena ias 13 The DEHD Menu Display Panel iii 13 Software Setup acierta abs 14 Installing and Launching the Content Management Application CMA 14 Verifying and Upgrading Fixture and CMA Software sss nnns 15 Configuring ILbPRD EIXUUE GS tai 16 Setup Configuration Using the Menu System ssssssss ens 16 Setup Configuration Using the CMA ccccccceeeeeseceeee meme eene nnn 17 DLHD Channel Range and Valid Start Channel esses 18 DMX Control ES eL TT 19 Patching the DL 3 Fixture to a Wholehog Console 00ococccccccccccccccnccnnnnnnnnnnnnno 19 Viewing OUEDUL useless ta tla OL e Rie tas A a b d A e n doceat 19 Shutting Down the Fixt re soos usu sasusaswsussEuaEERREEEESERARREERRERNSRRSEESERHREUEES 19 Recommended Shutdown Options occocccccccccncccnccccannn nc nc n cnn enne me enr 19 Placing Fixture i ROAA Case EE 20 Chapter 3 The Digital Light Menu System DLHD digital lights have an onboard Menu System you can use to configure the fixture review diagnostic feedback and view content information Menu Panel Componebts A a 21 LCD Display Adjustment Buttons s
28. 90 MASK SMQDES pida doo 90 Strobing Mask SHAPES an Rc 90 Mask oler caes 91 Mask Edge Fade tias la nd 92 Image Edge Fade noo caia 93 Keystone Correction Parameters eeeeessesee nena nnne aaa nn inna ann 94 KEVStONE RATO MT 95 CEVSTONE Y Rania cT 95 Framing Parameters inician 96 Chapter 12 Global Functions Collage Generator This chapter describes how to display content from multiple media servers in panoramic arrays and includes an example for creating a collage Collage OVerVIeW ia aa 97 Collage Parameters 2 vi i usa u vuaukWRoRRRVE SERRA REEEERERRASRRREAERNSRREEEENASRRREESREERERARREEEEA 98 CONT ID o O teas 98 Collage CoHhtiqguration Selectloh sssuaasc astu ai 100 Collage Cell Selection naci ica eis 100 Collage Blending AQ USMENU inside 101 Aligninent Pattern CODLOET a EE E UETIUPUR MD oit EOD tenet ER IIR UU DUE 102 Variable Edge BIGENGING iue oca s dise o ia 102 Collage Setup Example 53 n nrera ne nEErE aa MNNEEESNMEE MEE EE 103 Creating Custom Content for the Collage Generator Effect 104 Collages Using Live S Video and SDI Input eere 105 xiv DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effects can be applied to the Media File content texture mapped onto a 3 D object Multiple Color and Geometric effects are available in Effect Mode parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global
29. All _ Home H E Test_Home Screen Calibrate Motors Run El g Homing sets a fixture to its default positioning EIFI The fixture automatically homes whenever it is connected to power A Selecting Motion All lets you manually home A the entire fixture Selecting the button for Calibrate Motors realigns the Pan and Tilt stepper motors after maintenance procedures The fixture can also be remotely homed via a DMX controller see Chapter 6 Fixture Motion Functions Test Self Test Screen the graphics engine is operating without having to use a DMX controller You can check the mechanical functionality of Self Test Pan TIK al JE Pan Tilt I ris Zoom and Focus assemblies Self Test Iris ar A on the fixture head Select On to start the test self Test Zoom Off 1 M sequence Self Test Focus Off E The Video Test option opens the mechanical Video Test Test Pattern 1 JO E iris and provides test patterns to check the p projection functionality This lets you verify that H Reset Screen The Reset screen provides buttons to reset shutdown and upgrade software Reboot Media Server Restart Delete User Content Delete Upgrade Factory Content Upgrade Ws XH Reboot Media Server restarts the fixture s internal graphics engine software Delete User Content removes all user content on the selected fixture s Upgrade Factory Content lets you reinstall w om apa Ws xHd factory con
30. CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Name Description Lo AA Modifier Moditier2 Modifier3 From Red From Greento From Blue RGB Invert and Swap to GBR Hed to Green Green to Blue Blue to Red RGB Invert and Swap to BRG Hed to Blue Green to Red Blue to Green Horizontal Vertical Comparison Horizontal Vertical Comparison Texture Ripple Horizontal Amplitude Texture Ripple Vertical Amplitude Phase Texture Ripple Circular Amplitude 25 Texture Ripple Circular Asymmetrical Amplitude Transparent Color Fine selects key color using Modifier channels reen BUS i k 27 Transparent Color Medium selects key color MR Blue using Modifier channels 08 Transparent Color Coarse selects key color Green Blue using Modifier channels 29 Transparent Color Invert Fine selects key color Green Blue using Modifier channels Transparent Color Invert Medium selects key A Green Blue color using Modifier channels Transparent Color Invert Coarse selects key i Green Blue color using Modifier channels Scan Line converts image colors to colors in a Selects Fades to con l i Not used single line of the image scan line verted image Transparent Wipes opens the selected 33 graphic to reveal another graphic positioned Area of wipe behind it 30 31 32 Selects center Selects from 6 wipe options Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture IIS ecm TANE Sener reran and on X axis on Y axis amount of twist Picture in picture duplicate
31. Color Invert Coarse effect selects a color range 40 either side of the defined value Transparent Color Invert Medium Effect Mode parameter DMX value 30 The Transparent Color Invert Medium effect selects a color range 25 either side of the defined value Transparent Color Invert Fine Effect Mode parameter DMX value 29 The Transparent Color Invert Fine effect selects a color range 15 either side of the defined value DLHD Digital Light User Manual 151 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions UV Effect Mode Options Y Object Effect Global Effect These Object and Global effects map the media file to an YUV color space This makes it easier to isolate a specific feature in an image such as an individual flower in a landscape Graphic Object 1 Content Graphic Object 2 Background Content UV to Gray Effect Mode parameter DMX value 84 Maps a selected color coordinate to a YUV color Space and turns everything else gray Modifier 1 Adjusts the U color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts the V color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Adjusts the color tolerance from 0 i minimum to 255 100 maximum Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 229 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 101 152 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions UV Selected to Transparent Eff
32. DL 3 DL 2 and Axon compliant media for use with the Collage Generator First acquire or commission High resolution media footage or stills In most cases scaling and cropping of the media is a simple process However certain types of media such as footage of people or round objects like planets may require more sophisticated cropping and scaling to optimize display in certain aspect ratios 104 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Then save your media at Photo jpeg 95 or a non compressed format these can be very large files to use as a master file Or if you are an intermediate video editor yourself there are many Video editing packages that will allow you to size and optimize the master for your application Once the master file is created you will need high definition encoder software For more information on creating Digital Lighting content and selecting encoder software go to www highend com support digital_lighting Collages Using Live S Video and SDI Input DL 3 Axon and DL 2 media servers can create Collage arrays using live S Video or SDI input All the media servers used to project a Collage need to be receiving the same source input signal to use video as a Collage feed For example using DL 3 Camera outputting across a 2 x 2 20 K lumen Central Panorama Col lage four DL 3 fixtures are assigned an output from the SDI DMX Mixer Pro to each SDI input and a fifth
33. DL 3 fixture is used as the source DLHD Digital Light User Manual 105 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator 106 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter I3 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effects can be applied to the Media File content texture mapped onto a 3 D object Multiple Color and Geometric effects are available in Effect Mode parameters for both individual Graphic object and Global control Most of the effect options you will find described in this chapter are available for Effects Mode parameters at both the graphic control level for each Graphic Object and global control level for the composite image The following pages describe all the Effect Mode options available along with a description of how each Modifier parameter functions with that mode selected Options are arranged alphabetically and grouped as Color or Geometric Effects Check boxes in the upper right hand corner indicate whether this mode is available as a Graphic Object Effect a Global Effect or both M Object Effect Global Effect Because the options for all Effect Mode parameters are identical you can apply up to three effects at the graphic level and another five effects at the global level This lets you choose for example whether to apply a color effect to an individual object or to the composite image at the global level After you select a mode using either a Graphic Object Effect Mode or a Global Effect Mode parameter you
34. DMX values are set to Zero the Framing output will be unseen in modes 0 and 1 The images below show examples of the first two framing modes In the image on the left Modifier 1 selects the internal profile framing option with Modifier 2 selecting the frame pattern In the example on the right Modifier 1 selects the Graphic Object texture framing option with Modifier 2 selecting the frame pattern A Modifier 3 DMX value 10 designates the Frame texture as Graphic Object 2 s media file content minus any applied effects NOTE Global Image Edge Fade DMX values 100 Effect Mode parameter 133 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 1 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 15 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 251 Modifier 3 Not Used Modifier 3 parameter DMX 10 Framing Shutter Emulation When Modifier 1 is set to a DMX value 2 Modifier para meters 2 and 3 are not used Instead the four Global Image Edge Fade parameters control image to emulate framing shutters In the example to the right each Image Edge Fade parameter has been set to a DMX value 100 NOTE This technique is useful when your are running Version 1 Protocol Version 2 Protocol provides a much better solution for this situation with eight Framing Shutter channels 162 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 1 This parameter allows you to select from three framing modes Frames the image using an Inter
35. Digital Light User Manual 189 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Scene Change M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 100 This effect creates transparency in video content based on the change in pixel color from one frame to the next Modifiers 1 and 2 use the color difference between the current frame and the previous frame to derive an alpha value for the output frame Modifier 3 scales the color of the current frame to provide the color of the output frame Modifier 1 Scales RGB values of the previous frame from 0 maximum to 255 minimum scaling Modifier 2 Derives an alpha value from color difference between current frame and the result of modifier 1 DMX O to 127 act to make darker colors transparent with DMX 0 resulting in maximum transparency DMX values 128 to 255 act to make bright colors transparent with DMX 255 maximum transparency Modifier 3 Scales the RGB values of the current frame to provide the output RGB values DMX 0 provides the brightest output RGB values DMX 255 the darkest output RGB values Object 1 Original Content Object 2 Original Content Modifier parameter 1 DMX value 0 Modifier parameter 2 DMX value 255 Modifier parameter 3 DMX value 185 190 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions ShakeNBake M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 61 This effect randomly vibrates the im
36. EU 206 Syne Mode Parameter a oca 206 EftecE SVnehronlzalblObi tarta o 207 Synentonizinda Se ver tots le lucia inde 207 Synchronizing a Master Server to another Server ccc cece cece cent eee eeeeeesneanees 207 Chapter 15 Content Management Application CMA A Content Management Application CMA running on an Axon HD media server or a computer connected through an Ethernet network gives you remote control of content software and configuration management functions Ladhchingithe CM A orina AAA 210 Installing the CMA on Your Computer c ccocccccccccccnccnnnnnnncnncn mmn 210 Launchimgothie CMA ONAXON esis detur vv da 210 Auto DISCOVO 1 555050220 920000000202 0090 eo Pun NEL a aa a a ERN VV REA VM UE 211 gr adbid mleriaiMidfeczidio nM E LI E EE 211 xviii DLHD Digital Light User Manual The CMA Client WindOW ceccccccuccnccuccnceuuecuneuneuusuuneuueuueuueuuseuseuueuuseueeuuenunaues 212 Viewing Server Identification Information esses menn 213 Content OrgalbilzZeblobi sarine trant A Pda ed tulit anaes Ripa Rad Rd aditu eap E 214 Preloaded STOCK CON ria 214 Custom User Contento 215 Stock Media FINOS ur dodo ooo 215 ODE e ul e CT cidos 216 Viewing Server Configuration Data ssssesssssssene nennen nnns 216 VMIEWINO CONTENE Pet 216 VIEWING Folders irrita Oia 216 VIEWING FIGS e ER 217 Managing User Media and Object Content eee eene nnn 219 Naming and Deleting User
37. End Systems Inc 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA voice 512 836 2242 fax 512 837 5290 Toll Free 800 890 8989 High End Systems I nc 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA voice fax toll free 800 890 8989 email support highend com http www highend com 800 890 8989 512 834 9195 This High End Systems product is protected by patents and pending patent applications Patents owned or licensed by High End Systems include US 4 392 187 US 4 962 687 US 5 186 536 US 5 367 444 US 5 455 748 US 5 590 954 US 5 758 955 US 5 795 058 US 5 829 868 US 5 953 151 US 6 011 662 US 6 079 853 US 6 208 087 US 6 261 636 US 6 331 756 US 6 515 435 US 6 563 520 US 6 597 132 US 6 635 999 US 6 736 528 US 6 865 008 US 6 919 916 US 6 982 529 US 7 020 370 US 7 078 869 US 7 210 798 US 4 602 321 US 4 972 306 US 5 209 560 US 5 402 326 US 5 502 627 US 5 590 955 US 5 758 956 US 5 798 619 US 5 857 768 US 5 953 152 US 6 029 122 US 6 126 288 US 6 219 093 US 6 278 542 US 6 346 783 US 6 523 353 US 6 565 941 US 6 600 270 US 6 648 286 US 6 771 411 US 6 866 390 US 6 930 456 US 6 988 805 US 7 033 028 US 7 092 098 US 7 253 942 US 4 688 161 US 4 980 806 US 5 278 742 US 5 414 328 US 5 506 762 US 5 640 061 US 5 769 527 US 5 806 951 US 5 882 107 US 5 969 485 US 6 048 080 US 6 142 652 US 6 220 730 US 6 278 545 US 6 421 165 US 6 536
38. Fade Color C Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 129 This effect applies color to a selected Edge Fade parameter see Image Edge Fade on page 126 Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 ncreases blue color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Original Content Original Content with Edge Fade effect applied Modifier 1 parameter DMX 143 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 100 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 25 122 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Exposure Control M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 114 Exposure Control adjusts the image Black level and Contrast to optimize the projected image for your performance environment You can use it to easily modify the black level and contrast for a specific application Modifier 1 Expands or contracts color Modifier 2 Shifts color Modifier 3 Not Used Tip All the factory content provided has been optimized already This parameter and the Content Optimization option are especially useful for optimizing user content or camera capture Fire Gradient M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 112 This option maps image colors to a Red
39. Jackson and The Emmys among other shows vi DLHD Digital Light User Manual You can obtain more information about Suzy Vaughan Associates services by calling 818 988 5599 or emailing info suzyvaughan com Their website is www suzyvaughan com Suzy Vaughan is also an attorney specializing in intellectual property issues How much does it typically cost to license copyrighted material The answer depends entirely on what material you want to use and how you plan to use it Prices can range from hundreds of dollars for photography content to thousands of dollars for a highly desirable film video clip Since price is content sensitive the best thing to do is to contact a clearinghouse like Suzy Vaughan Associates and let them find out for you DLHD Digital Light User Manual vil viii DLHD Digital Light User Manual Table of Contents Chapter 1 DLHD High Definition Digital LightUser Manual Contacting High End Systems ccc cccccccc cece cece eee eee eene hens nhan ii uino e V ii Declaration of Conformity 2 ccc cece cece eee esee seen nnn iii Product Modification Warning ssssxsxezvsueteetesivasusunis sbsasuEaUE cios IV i894 neg E IV Important Safety informati n arrastro iio ais IV edge eC ee ee ee re ee re re ee re V Packaged Media NORICE aims V Warranty INTO Mac usa aecboo dn oaa mata ea V x
40. KB 1024 768 E24 30 0 20 80 E Nasa Images 25 El Grasep Field Fly By HD mpg mpg 27 32 961 KB 800 600 405 30 0 13 50 O Blue_Pory_Digital 2 E Green Glass HD mpg mpg 2B 67 016 kB 1024 768 T32 2d 0 30 50 HES Care 2 27 El Heur Glass HD mpg mpg 28 4B H27 KB 1440 1004 EDO 30 0620 0 4 V Squared Labs 2 7 Hydro Pump HD mpg mpg 30 44 127 KB 1024 768 482 24 20 8 e Vrlual L fe Media 2 E Icebergs HD mpa mpg 3l 78 124 KB 1024 BH Br 30 032 0 The stock media files provided by High End Systems have been compressed and optimized for reliable and smooth playback from AxonHD media servers Each file and folder has an associated DMX value These values are fixed for Stock Content but must be assigned for all user created content See Assigning DMX Values to User Content on page 219 for more information DLHD Digital Light User Manual 215 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Object Files Obj ect files are the 3 D object component files used to build a graphic image User Warps are Obj files created using the Warp Editor Axon HD protocol supports a combined total of 255 object files displayed in Stock Objects User Objects and User Warps folders As with Stock Media files the Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited A user created object file must be assigned a unique DMX value between 150 255 Viewing Server Configuration Data Selecting an individual server from the list in the left pa
41. M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 21 This effect displays only the edges of image components Edges appear white everything else is black Modifier 1 Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 02 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts vertical edge search size from 02 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from 02 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 184 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 114 Modifier 3 parameter DMX value 62 118 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge Detect Black and White e Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 92 This effect displays only the edges of image components as either black or white Modifier 1 Adjusts sample distance from 0 2 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from O no adjustment to 255 100 maxi mum adjustment Modifier 3 Sets the detected edge scaler 0 127 white edge on black background 128 255 black edge on white background Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 155 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 40 Modifier 3 parameter DMX value 129 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 119 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge Detect Color Y Object Eff
42. Media Folders Help HIGH END SYSTEMS B S All Servers 4 servers Name DW File Court Dove j MN 2B2BSF3E 0 CQHES Core HD 1080p 1 12 13 2013 4 57 21 PM n C User Media GA Luna Blue 2 a 12 13 2013 4 51 29 PM 3 User Objects C3Art Beats 3 13 12 13 2013 5 01 17 PM User Warps Beacon 4 22 12 13 2013 5 01 25 PM HL Stock Media CO FeedBack_Video 5 29 12 13 2013 4 53 10 PM E Stock Objects 5 Kristine_Schomaker 6 23 12 13 2013 4 58 50 PM J 9290244 0 CORabit Hole Creative 7 20 12 13 2013 4 59 15 PM H E User Media C Showfootage 8 28 12 13 2013 4 59 48 PM E User Objects COWilliam Strother g 35 12 13 2013 5 01 11 PM E User Warps CFeedBack Video Doors Curtains 10 10 12 13 2013 4 53 33 FM 3 Stock Media CFeedBack Video Marriage 11 52 12 13 2013 454 25 PM Stock Objects CFeedBack_Video_Religious 12 37 12 13 2013 4 55 02 PM i 178 0 COHES Core 13 39 12 13 2013 4 55 53 PM NEM HES Digital Aerials 1 14 108 12 13 20134 5742 PM H User Media C HES Oils 15 1d 12 13 2013 4 58 27 PM ES User Objects EJHES Atmospheric 16 31 12 13 2013 4 55 44 PM 3 User Warps E30n The Wall Studios 17 37 12 13 2013 4 59 00 PM H Stock Media C3Sean Bridwell 18 19 12 13 2013 4 59 23 PM Stock Objects 5A_Luna_Blue_2 19 49 12 13 2013 4 51 40 PM S AxonHDTG 75 Feedback Video 2 20 32 12 13 2013 4 53 16 PM H User Media CHES Texture 21 10 12 13 2013 4 58 33 PM 3 User Objects LQHES Foliage 22 31 12 13 2013 4 58 00 PM User Warps LEQHES R
43. Media Server to Your Local Drive The CMA supports downloading User content files or folders from a media server to your local drive To download a file or folder of User Content 1 Display the Folder or File that you wish to move in the right pane of the CMA window 2 If the destination for the file on your local drive is visible you can simply drag and drop the folder or file to that location or an external drive connected to your computer OR 3 Select Copy from the Media Files or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list 4 Browse to the destination on your hard drive then select Paste from the Media Files or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list 222 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a Media Server You can upload User Content Media files Media folders and Object files from your hard drive to a DL 3 DL 2 or Axon media server provided they are e A valid file format jpg gif png bmp avi mpg m2v for Media Files x for Object files You are uploading them to the appropriate User content folder on the media server They have been encoded correctly To upload content l Display the file or folder destination in the right pane of the CMA window 2 Browse to the file or folder you want to upload on your hard drive and click on it to select 3 Drag and drop it into the appropriate User content fol
44. Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value RGB Swap to BGR Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 41 This effect allows you to swap colors All red values become green and all blue values become red Green values are unaffected Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to blue from O no color change to 255 10096 green Modifier 2 No change to green color component Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 10096 red Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 192 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 142 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swap to BRG Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 8 This effect allows you to swap colors All red values become blue all green values become red and all blue values become green Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to blue from O no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to red from 0 no color change to 255 100 red Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 192 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light U
45. Mode Options Descriptions CMY Add Non black Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 3 This effect increases color values across all pixels except black pixels Modifier 1 Increases cyan color component from O no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum cyan saturation Modifier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum yellow saturation la u Sz ie dl a 2 LL de Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 112 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color Cycle Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 14 The image s color components cycle through RGB black and white When no Red Green or Blue is added image fades from full white to normal image to black When RGB CMY is added the image fades from the RGB value to the image with color added Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 10
46. Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 255 100 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 179 70 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 53 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Image Optimization Parameters Black Level The Black Level parameter reduces or increases the black level of the selected Graphic Object Default DMX Value 128 no black level adjustment to content image ooo Black level adjustment off 1 127 Black level set from minimum toward no adjustment No adjustment to contents original black level 129 255 Black level set from original toward maximum adjustment Contrast The Contrast parameter reduces or increases the contrast of the selected Graphic Object Default DMX Value 128 no black level adjustment to content image 00 Contrast adjustment off 1 127 Contrast set from minimum toward no adjustment No adjustment to contents original contrast 129 255 Contrast set from original toward maximum adjustment 54 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Effect Mode Parameters Three Effect Mode parameters are available for each individual 3 D object each with three Modifier parameters Each of the Effect Mode parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options This lets you apply a dual effect combination to the selected 3 D object NOTE Not all modes combine effectively For example you cannot glow a
47. There are up to 240 Media file folders with each capable of containing up to 255 image or movie media files This gives a theoretical total of 61 200 possible locations for Media image or movie files There is one DMX parameter used to identify a object so 255 DMX values are available between the Stock and User Content to identify objects Assigning DMX Values Automatically The CMA can automatically assign a unique DMX value to any file or folder that does not already have a value This automated assignment is based on alphabetically sorting the existing file folder names and assigning each item a unique consecutive integer To automatically assign DMX values to a single file or folder with user content l Display the User content folder or file in the right pane of the CMA Window 2 Select AutoSet DMX from either the Media Files folder or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to the file or the folder DLHD Digital Light User Manual 219 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA You can automatically assign DMX values to all folders at once or to all the files within a folder at once You cannot set both files and folder values at the same time To automatically assign DMX values to all the User content folders or all files within a User content folder 1 Display the User content folders or the files for a single folder in the right pane of the Content Management window and
48. This parameter determines particle acceleration A DMX value of 128 50 is the default Values on each side of the midpoint increase the particle acceleration from 0 slowest to 127 49 fastest and from 129 51 slowest to 255 100 fastest Original Content Content with Particle 1 effect applied Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 33 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 182 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Particle System e Effect Mode parameter DMX value 96 This option can be used to add additional modifier adjustments to the baseline effect you set up in the Particle System 1 effect Modifier 1 Determines the number of particles from 0 smallest number to 255 100 largest number of particles Modifier 2 Adjusts particle size from 0 smallest to 255 100 largest particle size Modifier parameter 1 DMX value 45 Modifier parameter 2 DMX value 62 Modifier parameter 3 DMX value 0 TIP Reducing the particle size enhances any trailing you set in the Particle System 1 effect Modifier 3 Adjusts the size of the emitter shape you selected in the Particle System 1 effect by spreading the source area from O the smallest source area to 255 100 the largest Particle System 3 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 97 If you have already sele
49. Two 169 254 179 247 2 0 0 2412 Axon O DL 3 One 169 254 153 131 20 00 2412 DL3 O Axon Three 169 254 249 83 20 00 2412 Axon The cloning process erases all destination server s user content and replaces it with the selected server s user content Stock content is unaffected 228 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Deleting Content To delete all User Content from a server ag Delete Content 1 In the CMA Client Window select a All Server in the left pane HIGH END SYSTEMS 2 Select the Server with the content you want to delete in the right pane Delete all content fram ane 3 From the drop down menu or the right click popup list select Delete Content A dialog box OKs cancels the action DMX Summary The DMX Summary lets you view all the content for a single server in a table format with the following details e Whether the content is a User Media file folder a Stock Media file folder or a Object The associated Folder Name for media files The Folder DMX value for media files The File Name for media or object files The File DMX value for media or object files To view the DMX summary table l Select All Servers from the left pane of the CMA Client Window 2 Select a Server in the right pane 3 Select DMX Summary from the drop down menu or the right click popup list DLHD Digital Light User Manual 229 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Applic
50. Used Modifier parameter DMX value 128 us A A x r E d Modifier parameter DMX value 190 Modifier2 parameter DMX value 2255 126 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Gray maker e Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 109 This option converts a color image to grayscale and then lets you adjust black level and contrast Modifier 1 Adjusts the black level of the grayscale image from a DMX value of 0 Full brightness to 255 completely black Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast of the grayscale image from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum contrast Modifier 3 Not Used i l 2 d 9 i m qe ER i oe y 3 i i r Ec UP NM iTia A F E mU TORE f L T y 1 Im 1 r j PE a4 Le g E Modifier1 parameter DMX value 128 ias E m y E rd dl p a A Modifier1 parameter DMX value 90 Modifier2 parameter DMX value 175 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 127 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions HS Effect Mode Options M Object Effect Global Effect These Object and Global effects map the media file to an HSI color space This makes it easier to isolate a specific feature in an image such as an individual flower in a landscape Object 1 Content Object 2 Background Content HS to Gray Effect Mode parameter DMX value 87 This effect Maps a selected color coordinate to an HSI color space and turns e
51. Vl aA AE EEE O n a EV V Y Va Vac a o a 101171740175 0 11 y ay PA LLUVIA ON AO TaN Fang na aa a i Oa EE FI ty 90950000 se ee ee cece Seiten cercas Seb eb eo eves es sv ese se OO V A DA DAA O OO e A AAA tta tt ntn VV TTA P File Name The File Name field contains a drop down list of all existing warps on the selected server When you create a new warp it s automatically assigned name is added to this field Elasticity moving selected points on the grid will affect only those points When no elasticity is applied When you check the Enable Elastic Distortion box adjacent control points to the ones you 253 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor select will also be affected as you move selected points The amount of change depends on the the proximity of a control point to one that is being moved Control Point Moved Elasticity not applied Elasticity applied Draw Wireframe Vertex By default both the Wireframe the gridlines connecting control points on the warp and the Vertex all of the control points on the warp are visible You have the option to deselect and hide either or both the wireframe and vertex Force Warp Output Checkerboard Force Warp Output allows you to see a warp Force Warp Output Checkerboard output while actively modifying it Force Output 1 x Checkerboard 0 Of Big Medium C Small Note Be aware that Force Out
52. You can also display grid overlays that show your selections for Collage Config and Collage Cell Selection parameters ooo Graphics out Normal blending per selected blend adjustment Graphics out Blend area defaulted to black 39 3 Graphics out Blend area shown with no blending applied ME Alignment pattern out Blend area defaulted to black Ls Alignment pattern out Blend area shown with no blending applied ME Grid cell selection shown over graphics output Variable Edge Blending Alignment pattern out Normal blending per selected blend adjustment 4 z Variable Edge Blending parameters are used in conjunction with the Collage Generator parameters and allow for on the fly adjustment of blend overlap between projectors These parameters allow more flexibility for sizing a collage to a given screen or projection surface as well as smoother blending if wider blend regions are used Horizontal and vertical blend regions can be controlled independently of one another The Variable Edge Blend Horizontal parameters allow 16 bit control of the horizontal blend region width from 0 hard edge up to 50 of the image size The default fixture library value has been chosen to give a 9 overlap this starting value is adjustable based on your specific installation The Variable Edge Blend Vertical parameters allow 16 bit control of the vertical blend region width from 0 hard edge up to 50 of the image size The default fixture library val
53. adjustment Values below the midpoint move the horizontal center of the zoom right to 0 2 maximum Values above the midpoint move the horizontal center of the zoom left to 255 maximum Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the vertical center of the zoom down as you approach 0 maximum Values above the midpoint move the vertical center of the zoom up to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 The default DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Values below the midpoint zoom in to the image centerpoint to O maximum image size Values above the midpoint zoom away from the image centerpoint to 255 a minimum image size Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 203 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions 204 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter I4 Synchronizing Content After designating a master fixture you can synchronize the content of other DLHD Axon HD Axon DL 3 or DL 2 fixtures to any Graphic Object on the master in terms of playback time rotation or both Netuiork Synchronization Overvieui Network Synchronization allows for certain functions of DL 3 DL 2 or Axon media servers to be synchronized over an Ethernet network This can be extremely useful in situations such as using the Collage Generator to ensure a seamless image with multiple media serv
54. and green Horizontal Vertical i Not Used component colors shift shift 61 ShakeNBake introduces a random vibration Horizontal Vertical effect Shake Shake Slats Vertical renders the image in offset Number Vertical 62 l vertical slats of Slats Displacement 63 Slats Horizontal renders the image in offset Number Horizontal horizontal slats of Slats Displacement Streak Angle Scale Fade from Normal to Slats Fade from Normal to Slats Fade from Downward Vertical Streaks pulls the image Vertical Start Normal to down Position Sample Number of Sample Number of i Horizontal Vertical 84 UV to Gray turns everything in the image gray U Coordinate V Coordinate except for a selected UV chroma coordinate 85 UV to Transparent turns the image transparent UCoordinate V Coordinate except for a selected UV chroma coordinate UV Select to Transparent turns only a selected UCoordnate VCoordnate UV chroma coordinate in the image transparent 87 HS to Gray retains selected hue and saturation Hue Saturation and turns everything else gray Coordinate Coordinate HS to Transparent retains selected hue and Streak Scales the Effect Scales the Sharpen Effect Not Used Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Tolerance Hue Saturation Coordinate Coordinate Tolerance saturation and turns everything else transparent Co DLHD Digital Light User Manual 83 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions DMX Adjustment
55. as to whether or not the unit is covered by warranty Any Product unit or parts returned to High End Systems must be packaged in a suitable manner to ensure the protection of such Product unit or parts and such package shall be clearly and prominently marked to indicate that the package contains returned Product units or parts and with an RMA number Accompany all returned Product units or parts with a written explanation of the alleged problem or malfunction Ship returned Product units or parts to 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin TX 78758 USA Note Freight Damage Claims are invalid for fixtures shipped in non factory boxes and packing materials Freight All shipping will be paid by the purchaser Items under warranty shall have return shipping paid by the manufacturer only in the Continental United States Under no circumstances will freight collect shipments be accepted Prepaid shipping does not include rush expediting such as air freight Air freight can be sent customer collect in the continental United States REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT AS PROVIDED FOR UNDER THIS WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER OTHER THAN THE LIMITED WARRANTY STATED ABOVE HIGH END SYSTEMS INC MAKES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WITH RESPECT TO ANY PRODUCT AND HIGH END SPECIFI CALLY DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPOSE HIGH END SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE INCLUDING LOS
56. at his own expense Important Safety Information Instructions pertaining to continued protection against fire electric shock and injury to persons are found in this manual Please read all instructions prior to assembling mounting and operating this equipment Important Informations De S curit Instructions relatives la protection permanente contre l incendie de choc lectrique excessive et des blessures se trouvent dans ce manuel S il vous pla t lire toutes les instructions avant d assembler d installer ou d utiliser cet quipement Wichtige Sicherheitshinweise Anweisungen fur den dauerhaften Schutz vor Feuer Stromschlag berm fsiger und Verletzungen werden in diesem Handbuch gefunden Bitte lesen Sie die Anleitung vor der Montage der Installation oder der Verwendung dieses Gerats Informazioni I mportanti Di Sicurezza Le istruzioni in materia di protezione permanente contro gli incendi scosse elettriche eccessivi e lesioni si trovano in questo manuale Si prega di leggere tutte le istruzioni prima di assemblare installare o utilizzare questa apparecchiatura Informacion I mportante De Seguridad Instrucciones relativas a la protecci n permanente contra incendio descarga el ctrica excesiva y las lesiones se encuentran en este manual Lea todas las instrucciones antes de ensamblar instalar o utilizar este equipo Iv DLHD Digital Light User Manual Symbols The following international caution and warning
57. before you open the lamp cover The inside of the projector can become very hot Always replace with a lamp assembly of the same type Do not drop the lamp module or touch the glass bulb The glass can shatter and cause injury In the unlikely event that the bulb ruptures small glass fragments may be generated The lamp module is designed to contain these fragments but use caution when removing the lamp module Access the Lamp Module 1 Shut down the fixture and disconnect from power 2 Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes 3 Use the tilt lock to secure the unit in position 4 Unlatch and remove the rear bezel 5 Disconnect the power cable 6 Loosen the two thumbscrews holding the projector bracket and slide the projector out of the fixture 7 Loosen the thumbscrew and open the lamp cover 8 Grasping the handle pull out the lamp assembly 9 Replace the lamp assembly see Related Products and Accessories on page 4 10 Close the lamp cover and tighten the two lap cover screws 11 Reconnect to power The fixture will begin to home DLHD Digital Light User Manual 267 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Removing the Projector In the event that you need to remove the projector to return for service or to access the lens use the following steps 1 Disconnect Zoom HD1 and the Focus HD2 Tilt and lock the head at 90 horizontal with On the rear of th
58. between a black and white grid and adjust color peaking Modifier 1 Controls the tile size The default DMX value of O displays a 100 x 100 grid of tiles Increasing the DMX value decreases the grid divisions to a minimum of 10 x 10 at a value of 255 10096 NOTE A small number of larger tiles will also result in reduced color variation Modifier 2 Adjusts the grid spacing and color around each tile A DMX value of O the mini mum black line between tiles The spacing increases to a maximum at a DMX value of 127 4996 At a value of 128 5096 the space between tiles reverts to the minimum spacing and turns white Increasing the value further increases the white spacing to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the color peaking to simulate lighting at the tile edges A DMX value of O no adjustment and flat color across the tile As you increase the DMX value the peaking increases to a maximum at 255 100 te il eee Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 188 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 139 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 165 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Film Burn Unburn M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 93 This effect creates multiple burn patterns over the image Modifier 1 Adjust the burn through rate A DMX value of 65 begins creating a burn pattern with flames from 64 slowest to 127 fasted rate Va
59. control Effect Mode Color Options ui naa 108 AORNO CANO E 108 Background Color stan 109 Background Color Cycle Y yirs a a dio 109 CMY ta RN 110 CMY AddAIUPIXelS saaden e aE T a A Rd dp tes 111 CMY Add None black PIXelS union aa 112 COMENCE dada 113 Color DeCON VETAS ini isla la da 113 COIOFIZe Gdy 5 Cale netatenoat oct aan 114 Color OAP m e Tm 115 Color TOARN a Verten scsi srl a 116 COLO TOM a as TA 117 DOUP and RESAMpPIG a a 117 Edge Detect Black and White 3 Las A dd 118 Edge Detect Black and White 2 ssssssseess ene nemen nnns 119 Edge Detect Color i t edsee m puteus nooo 120 Edge Detect Color 2 soot tah iaa led ia 121 Edge Fade Color aus aa 122 EXDOSHRe CONtrOl ando ile orde sas 123 POG Ce WE de EEUU 123 GLOW CR Tc T Er EET 124 Glow Color CY CIE sieeve c dido ota 125 Gray Makek MPO TN 126 Gray Maker 2 EE 127 HS Eifect Mode OPHUONS ca T E ve PLU IDE M dM 128 HO TOLVA AA ANA 128 HS Selected to Transparent ii A O Na 129 Hato Transparent ia eE ENE A T ET T 129 NESST dotadas 130 Mas Color RN RO doi 131 Mask Colof and Edge Fade Color au 132 Negative ATE e esta UE 133 oig arta 134 PUSO SEDIT ta TTE 135 Plus TOR EO eslora tt ina 136 RGB Add All Pixels A a Did 137 DLHD Digital Light User Manual RGBA AU PIXGIS acond Aa 138 RGB Add to Nonsblack PPXels E ta a 138 RGB AVEC alados 139 RGB Invertahd Swap tO BRG uid ee a dai inta dafs 140 RGB Invert and SWwap to GBR venus ceci coi 141 RGB S
60. del tipo e della taratura adatta e Mantenere una distanza minima di 1 0 metri 3 28 piedi dagli oggetti accesi Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico massima di 20 ampere Vigtig Sikkerhedsinformation Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock VIGTIGT LEDEREN MED GUL GROEN ISOLATION MAA KUN TILSLUTTES KLEMME MAERKET O ELLER DLHD Digital Light User Manual 295 APPENDIX C Safety Information 296 DLHD Digital Light User Manual
61. deselect all files or folders 2 Select Autoset All DMX from either the Media Folders or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list The CMA will assign a valid DMX value to all selected files or folders Using the same steps you can also Reset DMX for a single file or folder or Reset All DMX for all display files or folders displayed in the right pane to zero Editing User Content DMX Values You can manually assign any valid DMX value to your files or folders by selecting the file or folder in the right pane and then using the pull down menu or the right click popup selecting Edit DMX A dialog box will allow you to input the DMX value If it is a valid value from 0 255 the CMA will change the DMX value displayed for the file or folder Valid DMX Values Certain DMX values are Reserved for special purposes and are not user assignable You can change the assigned DMX value for a User Content item to another valid DMX value A valid DMX value is From 0 255 s not one of the reserved values for that type of content Is unique from other content of its type except for zero The following table shows valid and reserved values for User Content Media Folders 100 No Selection media file collections Default Stock media 56 239 User collections Internal Camera video feed 220 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Moving User Content Files and Folders User content c
62. each cue It is not necessary to precisely optimize images before preparing for a show Graphics Control Hierarchy There is a hierarchy to the DMX control parameters In general object control parameters render individual graphic images Global control parameters act upon the composite image created by combining multiple objects Motion parameters control the fixture movement and projection It is especially important to keep this in mind when applying graphical effects At the lowest level Graphic effects are applied to an individual 3 D Graphic Object Any Global effects applied affect each object in the combined Object image Finally motion effects control the projection of the composite image DLHD Digital Light User Manual 49 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Engine Overview Graphics Engine Function Flow Define up to ten 3 D objects with applied texture Opacity f Opacity Opacity Opacity Opacity Playback Playback Playback Playback Contrast Contrast Contrast Contrast Graphic P to each object i JE Effect3 a x H m ES Rotation Rotation Rotation Audio Balance Audio Balance Global Effect 1 Audio Balance Audio Balance Global Effect 2 Global Effect 3 Global Functions are then applied to the Global Effect 4 composite object ima
63. fixture 264 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Check the following warnings and cautions before servicing the filters WARNINGS Disconnect power before servicing Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only Do not operate a projector with Air Filter removed Dust may accumulate on LCD Panel and Projection Mirror degrading projection quality AN Do not put small parts into Air Intake Vents It may result in malfunction of a projector Cleaning the Base Housing Filter This filter is located between the handles on the fan side of the box You can pull it off the fixture and clean it with soap and water Allow it to dry thoroughly before replacing Replacing the Fixture Filter A HEPA filter and a prefilter are located inside the fixture Top cover Loosen Quarter turn screws to remove top cover head and should be replaced whenever they become discolored from particulates or when the Menu displays Fl LTER Service ERROR or FILTER Service WARN Filter bracket Filter Remove philips screws and lift filter bracket Access the fixture filters 1 Lock the fixture head in the 907 tilt position Rear Bezel 2 Unlatch and remove the rear bezel assembly 3 Loosen the two captive phillips head screws on the top cover and remove the top cover 4 Slide the top cover back to free it from the front bezel Open Latches to remove Insp
64. functionality Projector Powerup DMX d Zoom Override 128 3 Off ala Projector Control Focus Override 128 3 Off E E Projector Lamp field lets you manually turn Projector Ceiling Off HE the lamp On or Off Projector Rear Off ba Use the Projector Powerup field to choose the Lens Type Standard la control option for turning the lamp on The E options are Always On Manual and DMX This Projector Defaults Reset only takes effect when the fixture powers up Always On turns the projector lamp on when the fixture starts up regardless of whether there is a DMX Art Net signal If there is no DMX Art Net signal the lamp shuts off when the shutdown timeout period expires Manual turns on the projector lamp only when set to On via DMX Menu or the CMA e DMX only turns the lamp on when it receives a DMX signal or Art Net signal When the internal projector menu is selected for display you may need to manually adjust the zoom and or focus parameters to view the display clearly Setting the Zoom Override or Focus Override options to ON overrides the DMX values sent by the console and allow you to control Zoom and Focus manually with a DMX decimal value between 0 255 Projector Ceiling rotates the image 180 degrees Projector Rear projects a mirror invert of the image for rear screen projection applications Selecting ON in the Projector Defaults field resets all the options on the Projector tab to their factory default settings For more
65. modify fixture settings Some settings like Lamp Hours Software Versions etc are view only Other settings such as Fixture ID various Projector settings DMX Start Channel etc can be modified configured NOTE All of these settings are also available for DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures through the Digital Light onboard menu system The CMA also has some additional configuration features that let you Assign a name to servers connected over the network for easier identification of servers on your network Compare all the Configuration Items of a certain type for a group of fixtures For example viewing the DMX Start Channels of all the fixtures on a network Control monitor display settings for Axon media servers Vieuiing Current Configuration of All Servers To view configuration information for all Servers on the network select All Configurations in the left pane The right pane now displays configuration values for all the media servers on the fixture link in a sortable table Click in the column heading to sort by that column s values A symbol appears in the sort by column heading High End Systems Content Management Application Ele Servers Heb HIGH END SYSTEMS 1388 Al Servers 6 servers Fixture ID Foture Name IP Address Model eed DMX Start Chant eme E a DL20ne 1 q A EE a FELD MEE B DL2 Two 2 2 DL2Two 10210226 DO 1 40 1588 T c m fl DL2 Three 3 3 DL2Thee 10210225 DO 1 4 0 1588
66. movement when changing from one position to another MSpeed provides a method for all motors to reach their target position at the same time even though each motor may have different distances to travel MSpeed movement is extremely smooth because the fixture controls movements independent of DMX refresh rates MSpeed times vary from 0 15 seconds to 252 7 seconds In general allowing the console to crossfade the pan and tilt values for a DL 3 or DL 2 fixture is acceptable However extremely slow movements may require the use of Mspeed instead of console crossfades For a listing of exact MSpeed times see Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table Control Function Options The Control parameter remotely initiates various fixture operations and allows access to the internal projector menu controls Fixture Operations NOTE All of the following Fixture operation Control parameter settings except for MSpeed Off require the Dimmer be closed DMX Value 0 46 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 6 Fixture Motion Functions Projector Control Control Parameter Projector Options These Control parameter options remotely access and operate the internal projector s menu system Control Option Description Displays the Projector s internal Menu System Projector Up arrow NOTE These options control the directional buttons on the projector menu display and cannot be activated until you set the Dimmer parameter to 0 Proje
67. no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum green saturation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 47 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 127 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 131 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Mask Color and Edge Fade Color Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 130 This effect applies a color to both the selected Mask shape and any selected Edge parameter Color can also be applied to Mask shape and Edge parameters separately Modifier 1 Increases red color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Original Content Original Content with Mask Color and Edge Fade Color effect applied Modifier 1 parameter DMX 8 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 112 132 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Negative Art Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Ef
68. of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 125 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 140 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 10 108 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Background Color Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 131 There is a default black background behind every composite image You cannot rotate scale or position the background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position This effect allows you to apply color to the background This background color will not affect any of the Graphic Object effects selected Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from DMX values of 0 no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component Modifier 1 parameter DMX 220 from DMX values of 0 no green to 255 10076 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 97 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from DMX values of O 2 no blue to 255 10096 2 maximum blue saturation Background Color Cycle Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 132 There is a background behind every composite image You cannot rotate scale or position the background and it is visible from every viewpoint and position This effect allows
69. of the media files loaded on a media server in the Content Management Application s thumbnails view see Viewing Content on page 257 or in the File Tab of a DL 3 or DL 2 fixture menu display Defining a Media File Segment You can define any portion of a video media file to play using the In Frame and Out Frame parameters By default the In Frame is the beginning of the media file and the Out Frame is the end of the file Media files can have different lengths NOTE Media that is not properly encoded may still play but may have issues when using In Frame and Out Frame parameters In Frame and Out Frame Parameters You can select any segment of a media file for playback by assigning an In Frame value as a start point and an Out Frame as an end point NOTE DMX parameter values for these parameters do not correspond to a particular frame They are defined as a percentage of the movie length This makes it possible to create segments with an Out Frame preceding the In Frame and simplifies playback synchronization between media files The In Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to a starting point for the playback segment of the selected file The Out Frame parameter corresponds to a 16 bit DMX value equal to an end point for the playback segment of the selected media file Assigning the In Frame and Out Frame parameters to default DMX values will playback the entire movie file Choosing other settings are useful
70. om r Pe 2 a om a P Tis E na z gt j ae v r a a E 1 oa a ae E E j ue h r m y m s a j i Eus i bi a f s e E e e e 3 E i M L t ts L ins t L ue L E 7 M a iss e ELM im m k E ma o EN m E is ei ae Ta I ri B v us ipe vu e E n a Ps ee it a me Ca ve a ae 5 lm m e zu e us zu a a B Em Sam a a C DLHD Digital Light User Manual 259 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor 2 When selecting 3 points the face will be created between the three selected points 3 When selection zero points the face will be created by subdividing the adjacent lines This only works when creating a face inside an existing face 260 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Complex forms can be created by combining and deleting faces DLHD Digital Light User Manual 261 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor 262 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter I7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes information on replacing parts cleaning the fixture and some basic troubleshooting procedures The following toolset should be all you need for the maintenance procedures in this chapter e 3 mm allen wrench e 5 mm allen wrench e 2 Phillips screwdriver Gloves P
71. option of the control channel see Fixture Operations on page 240 2 The DL 3 fixture automatically shuts down in the event of DMX data loss The default time is 10 min WARNING Removing power directly without the shutdown sequence built into the two recommended procedures can severely reduce fixture reliability DLHD Digital Light User Manual 19 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Placing Fixture in Road Case Before shipping the DL 3 fixture lock its pan and tilt position so the fixture does not move during transit To lock the fixture 1 Orient the projector head pan position as shown for packing in the road case 2 Secure with the pan lock located on the yoke base NOTE This is the only pan position that locks 3 Move the tilt lock peg to the upper left dur e locked position 4 Gently move the projector head and yoke to verify that both pan and tilt positions are locked in place 5 Place the DL 3 fixture in its provided road case for shipping WY 2 Bring sides of case together and latch 20 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 3 The Digital Light Menu System DLHD digital lights have an onboard Menu System you can use to configure the fixture review diagnostic feedback and view content information DLHD fixtures use a 5 LCD screen to display the onboard menu system Navigation and select buttons let you move to different tab levels and options displayed on the
72. or in the DL 3 or DL 2 fixture s Menu system Server Name is a name you assign to a Digital Light fixture or Axon server IP Address is assigned to that unit by the router or Auto IP Software Version Number e Model identifies the media server as a DL 3 DL 2 Axon Axon HD 8 High End Systems Content Management Application c E93 em File Servers Help HIGH END SYSTEMS Al Servers 8 servers Software Version Model o EB DL3 One 1 Da DL 3 Two 168 254 11 144 20 0 2385 DL3 j EHA User Media III 11 Axon one 169 254 150 81 20 0 2385 Axon A User Objects HM 14 Axon Four 169 254 122 38 20 0 2385 Axon uk edm liM 12 Axon Two 169 254 179 247 2002385 Fein s br eda a B DL 3 One 169 254 153 131 2 0 0 2385 DL3 Bs DL 3 Five 169 254 60 53 2 0 0 2385 DL3 F iem B DL3Th 169 254 112 58 20 0 2385 DL3 MB imn 3 Tee 925411258 200 IM Axon one 11 ine eH Axon Two 12 Refresh FHM Axon three 13 EM Axon Four 14 Clone Content if All Configuration Delete Content Create Content Archive Deploy Content Archive Upgrade Software DMA Summary Download Log Identify la la A d Client IP 169 254 72 242 NOTE Clicking in a column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column In the All Server view the drop down Servers menu or right clicking to select a server in the right pane gives you these options Refresh the screen Clone Content replicates the server s user content t
73. output including multi fixture image panoramas created with the Collage Generator Effect see Global Functions Collage Generator Effect on page 133 Use these adjustments in conjunction with Keystone parameters and Ratio parameters to refine the output shape on any of these surfaces Effect Mode DMX Value Curved Vertical Convex Cylinder opening toward projector Curved Vertical Concave Cylinder opening away from projector Vertical Inside Corner opening toward projector Vertical Outside Corner opening away from projector Convex Disk opening away from projector Curved Horizontal Convex Cylinder opening toward projector Curved Horizontal Concave Cylinder opening away from projector DLHD Digital Light User Manual 157 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions After you have selected the surface the Modifier parameters operate as described below TIP Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global and Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Modifier chamnels for Effect Modes 2 and 3 are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 Modifier 1 Modifier 1 lets you adjust the amount of correction vertically A value of O no adjustment The correction increases as you inc
74. output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output situations This parameter adjusts the output by compressing or expanding the image vertically Default DMX Value 128 50 no adjustment DMX value settings below the midpoint of the range compress the image vertically from 0 maximum compression to 255 100 no compression Y Ratio DMX value 255 100 DMX value settings above the midpoint of the aug value 255 100 range expands the image vertically from 128 no expansion to 255 100 maximum expansion DLHD Digital Light User Manual 95 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Framing Parameters Eight Framing parameters allow you Top Left X Top Right X to clip an image from each corner in mans y horizontal and vertical directions Jn a Default DMX Value 0 no effect Left Y applied Each corner has an x and a y value that adjust and correct scale of the Bottom projection from any corner toward the Left Y image center on that axis Framing Top Left X DMX value 8 Framing Top Left X DMX value 5 Framing Top Left Y DMX value 31 Framing Top Right X DMX value 188 Framing Top Right X DMX value 32 Framing Bottom Right X DMX value 5 Framing Bottom Left X DMX value 23 Framing Bottom Left X DMX value 188 Framing Bottom Left X DMX value 67 Other Framing parameter DMX values 0 Other Framing parameter DMX values 0 Setting all Framing X and Y parameters DMX values to
75. smooth playback motion at slow speeds 68 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter lO Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and speed along with its position and scale in X Y and Z axis directions The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define Parameters for composite image rotation position and global scale are described in Chapter 11 Global Functions NOTE The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output Rotating a 3 D Object The Rotation parameters for each object control 3 D object rotation with 16 bit precision You can rotate a 3 D object up to 720 in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction around the X Y and or Z axis NOTE Remember that rotation changes could affect an object s relationship to other objects When you rotate an object you are rotating it around the selected axis X Rotation produces the effect of a top to bottom flip Y Rotation produces a left to right flip Z Rotation causes a circular motion X Rotation Y Rotation Z Rotation Rotates image Rotates image Rotates image about about the X axis about the Y axis the Z axis DLHD Digital Light User Manual 69 CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale The Rotation paramete
76. switch to full screen mode within 12 seconds The Preview function always shows the latest selected content without any modification of effects Preview mode displays movies and still images only S video and internal camera input will not be displayed in the Preview mode The Preview function uses substantial memory and should be turned off when rendering multiple Graphic Object options to ensure high quality playback DLHD Digital Light User Manual 31 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System NOTE After selecting the On or Preview option you can use the numeric up down control to adjust the Menu display brightness level from 25 dim to 100 brightest e Off turns off the display after 20 seconds of inactivity Touching any button on the fixture menu will re enable the display The Display Invert field inverts the display and navigation control functions This is useful in certain fixture orientations There are three invert control options On manually inverts the display and navigation buttons Off manually turns off the display invert function Auto sets the display to invert automatically when the fixture is rotated more than 45 off the horizontal axis This is the default setting Restoring Factory Defaults Selecting On in the Factory Defaults field restores all factory default fixture settings Set Projector Screen EE The Projector sub tab provides settings related Projector Lamp On El to the internal projector
77. value 223 All Scale DMX values 32768 50 Scaled 7 5 times in Z direction DLHD Digital Light User Manual 75 CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Changing Object Position You can reposition each 3 D object s position in 3 D space by moving it along the X Y and Z axes The following parameters act on an individual object Use these parameters to position 3 D images in relation to each other X Position The X Position parameter moves your object along the X axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the X axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object left and values above the DMX midpoint move the object right Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 X Position DMX value 32022 All Position DMX values 32768 50 Object 1 X Position DMX value 33561 76 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Position The Y Position parameter moves your object along the Y axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the image on the Y axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object down and values above the DMX midpoint move the object up Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 Y Position DMX value 32255 All Position DMX values 327
78. vertical angle A value of 0 no adjustment The num ber of degrees of angle increases as you increase value to maximum at 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the center of the latitude angle A value of 128 no adjustment and assumes the center of the latitude angle is at the equator Values below the midpoint move the center of the latitude angle down with 0 maximum distance below the equator Values above the midpoint move the center of the latitude angle up to 255 maximum distance above the equator NOTE When the Spherical Mapping effect is selected in a Global Effect parameter and a Graphic Effect parameter s DMX value 253 the Graphic Effect Modifier parameters make the following Spherical Mapping adjustments Modifier 1 Controls the vertical offset of the projector A value of 128 no adjustment to maximum at 255 100 Values below the midpoint compress the grid toward the equator Values above the midpoint stretch the horizontal grid lines away from the equator DLHD Digital Light User Manual 195 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 2 Adjusts the vertical offset of the sphere A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Adjusting toward O moves the center of the adjustment down toward the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the bend center up to the top of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts to the size of the sphere A DMX value of
79. when a filter needs to be cleaned or replaced These appear in a large format that can be viewed from a distance The Info Status menu screen will include a detailed message concerning the large format Error Warning filter message The following messages will give you information regarding the status of the DLHD filter system Filter Missing Error A filter not present or is not installed properly Check and insert missing filter Filter Service Warning The filter system is not operating optimally and needs to be serviced soon Filter Service Error The filter system needs immediate servicing Replace Filter For these and other Error Warning messages see Status Message Menu Display on page 275 Cleaning and Replacing Filters The DLHD system utilizes multiple filters to protect the internal media server and projector A filter is located on the side of the fixture base housing attached with velcro for easy removal and cleaning Check this filter often for dust or debris that can be caused when using the DLHD in environments with confetti or pyrotechnics This filter is washable but must be completely dry before re installing The internal projector has an electrically operated filter cartridge that automatically advances to replace the filtering material periodically based on hours of use It shouldn t require any maintenance For more information regarding this filter you can refer to the projector manual that was shipped with your
80. when you want to Begin or end a media file at any point other than the default e Start or stop on a specific image You need to shorten the media file to a specific length DLHD Digital Light User Manual 65 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content In Frame Default DMX Value 0 The beginning of a media file is the playback start point Out Frame Default DMX Value 65535 The end of a media file is the playback endpoint As you move from 0 to 100 of the In Frame value range you can select the beginning of a media file segment as a percentage of the file length Moving from O to 100 of the Out Frame value range selects the end of a media file segment as a percentage of the file length Segment Selection Examples Example 1 In Frame Out Frame You can create a segment anywhere between the beginning and the end of a media file The In Frame does not have to precede the Out Frame To skip a segment in the center of a media file set the In Frame to a point following the Out Frame The file will play from the In Frame to the end and then start at the beginning of the file and play to the Out Frame When you create a segment in this way you may notice a jump as playback skips from the end of the Example 2 l Out Frame In Frame l file to the beginning 66 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Defining Playback After selecting and defining a media file segment t
81. 0 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Increases blue color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Color DeConverge Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 39 This effect separates the different color components of an image and offsets them from the original image position Modifier 1 Moves the image s red component up from 02 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum distance from original position Modifier 2 Moves the image s green component down and right from 02 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Moves the image s blue component down and left from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 211 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 67 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 113 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Colorize Gray Scale M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 44 This effect maps a selected pixel intensity to a selected color scheme A variety of color schemes simulate effects like thermography This is especially effective effect when applied to input from the internal camera Modifier 1 Selects from color schemes along a range of values from 0 255 Modifier 2 Sets the zero point of the color intensity level from 0 no intensity to 255 100 maximum intensity Modifier 3 Fades from original c
82. 1 CHAPTER 7 Graphics Engine Overview 52 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 8 Graphic Functions You can adjust opacity black level contrast and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to each individual Graphic Object The parameters described in this chapter are set for each Graphic Object you define Parameters for composite image intensity and effects are described in Chapter 11 Global Functions on page 113 NOTE The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output Opacity Adjusting an object s opacity allows one object to show through another You can adjust the opacity of an individual 3 D object from completely transparent to full opacity using this parameter Increase opacity from not visible at a value of zero to full opacity at a value of 255 Default DMX Value 0 completely transparent The Global Intensity parameter provides a similar adjustment to the combined image This global control parameter controls intensity levels on the overall image see Global Intensity on page 113 When you have multiple objects in relation to each other the Global Intensity parameter is the best way to apply a fade to the composite image Tip The Dimmer Object Opacity and Global I ntensity parameters all have to be greater than 0 to make a defined image visible Graphic
83. 12 console configure the fixture by Identifying the DMX Source for the fixture Selecting the Protocol and the number of Graphic Objects to determine the DMX channel footprint this fixture will utilize Selecting a Fixture I D number to identify this fixture on the DLHD fixture link required if you will be synchronizing output between fixtures Assigning a valid Start Channel the first channel in the unique range of DMX channels designated by the console for this fixture You can configure fixtures directly using the DLHD menu system or remotely using the Content Management Application CMA Setup Configuration Using the Menu System All setup parameters are located on the DLHD fixture s menu DMX Screen For detailed information on using the DLHD Menu System see Chapter 3 The Digital Light Menu System on page 23 Select a Source 1 DMX Source defines the source of DMX data DMX512 Data is transmitted over standard DMX cables Art Net Data is transmitted over Ethernet cables using the Art Net protocol Set the number of DMX Universes and DL 3 Ethernet Subnetworks containing this fixture from 0 16 Set the Channel Range Zi 3 Choose a Software Version e V1 Version 1 protocol retains the original DMX protocol footprint and is compatible with legacy shows e V2 Version 2 provides 27 additional channels Select the number of Graphic Object Layers required for your application For more
84. 14 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 185 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 138 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Invert M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 17 This effect inverts color values to transition the image from an RGB to a CMY color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a DMX value O to cyan at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a DMX value O to magenta at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a DMX value O to yellow at a value of 255 100 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 34 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 203 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 139 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Invert and Swap to BRG M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 19 This effect swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted BRG color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a value of O to yellow at a value of 255 10096 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a value of O to cyan at a value of 255 10096 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at a value of O to magenta at a value of 255 10096 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier
85. 2 parameter DMX 34 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 203 140 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Invert and Swap to GBR M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 18 This effect swaps the color values from RGB to an inverted GBR color model Modifier 1 Transitions the red component from no adjustment at a DMX value O to magenta at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Transitions the green component from no adjustment at a DMX value O to yellow at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Transitions the blue component from no adjustment at DMX value 0 to cyan ata value 255 100 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 34 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 203 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 141 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Scale M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 47 Reduce and increase color components in the image as a part of the overall color range NOTE the maximum of Mod1 Mod2 and Mod3 sets overall color range Modifier 1 Scales Red in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value Modifier 2 Scales Green in the Media file A DMX Value of 128 no adjustment DMX values below 128 50 reduce color value DMX values over 128 increase color value Modifier 3 Scales Blue in the
86. 304178 0 Gacenotry 4 ul y n TM 4 B oekcusE m Rectangular Gnd j Leie 3 New 4 User Media D User Objects Camera Options Om Perspecimw Camera 4 11 Stock Meda D Stock Objects File Name Contre of operat 5 AxenTG 37 m I AxonHDPro TG 100 Q Al Conbgurabon F gars Centre Filo Name RectangieWarp21 obj Elasticity Enable Eleste Distortion Drew WentramofVerteo y Vivetrame y Vertex Force Warp Output Checkerboard Force Output 1 Checkerboard G Of Undo Redo Undo Redo 20 Warps Disk Free Space 11 65 GB Cheat P 10 10024 Camera Options Camera Options The Camera Options field lets you select the Perspective Camera ce way you want to view the editing grid The perspective view is the option most associated with sketching An orthographic gives a typical drafting view with no perspective indication Centre of Operations A When you drag a set of control points to shape Figure Cente Iv the mesh you can reference the change to the center of the figure or to the center of the editing points you have selected to move In the example below 12 control points were selected and scaled down The grid on the left shows the 250 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor result with the Centre on Figure option selected and the figure on the right shows the result when Centre on Selection is selected Rotation Rotation Deg You can rotate a selection o
87. 525353 res aerea RE C RUD RUE MUN 244 Manipulating the Mesh Display eeeeeeeene eene n nnne 245 EIN Fields ia A A 245 Geometry Editing Feld cunado OD ouetadwer2 245 RectangUla Gdl 245 Spline Rectangular Gil six cuts anctvi x ace adhs Sane suma potros 245 A Uu I ON 246 HOMHZoNtalCUVIRder caracol icdtlna 247 Sas Eo A Ter 248 COMO alt UI a GR tb t pan tts ua 249 Camera ODUONS a a ate ula 250 Centre Of Operations A di 250 ROTACION TERRE T UI ri 251 A EN 251 RESOMITION sans CP 252 AE O T TL NUT 253 mire don n o EM T Mp caia tidad S DERNIER 253 XX DLHD Digital Light User Manual Draw Wireframe Mettex v ioa reb ee Re Rl aate PE o A pO de d e o vans 254 Force Warp Output Checkerboard sesesseene enne nnns 254 Edit Undo History and Reset View sssssssssessene e eese nnns 255 Detal 12110 SS NP 255 PONESI ZO diodos 255 Getting Started mio a 256 creating a New Wann aiii 256 Deleting Geometry from Mesh sssssssseeseeen nemen ness nnns 256 Chapter 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting This chapter includes information on replacing parts cleaning the fixture and some basic troubleshooting procedures Pan and Tilt LOCKING simios ees 263 Maintaining the Filtering System eeee esee enean annnm nana nnns 264 FIT Warmin S sa E 264 Cleaning and Replacing Filters o ooocccccccccccconccccnnncnncncn mme emen nnns 264 Cleaning the Base Housing Fil
88. 68 50 Object 1 Y Position DMX value 33269 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 77 CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Z Positior The Z Position parameter moves your object along the Z axis with 16 bit precision The midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range centers the object on the Z axis Values below the DMX midpoint move the object away from the viewer and appears to become smaller and object above the DMX midpoint move the object toward the viewer and appears to become larger Default DMX Value 32768 50 object centered in frame Tip This parameter can create a zoom effect Remember that by moving an object you can obscure other objects or move it behind your viewpoint where it is no longer visible a bo Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 31884 All Position DMX values 32768 50 h Object 1 Z Position DMX value 32822 Object 1 Z Position DMX value 33144 78 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter II Global Functions Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining multiple separate object graphics You can adjust intensity define masks select a point in space to view the composite image and control keystone correction Global Intensity The Global Intensity parameter creates a smooth fade to video black that doesn t affect the opacity relationship between individual objects Use this parameter to adjust the int
89. 7 The selected size displays in the upper right corner of the grid pattern A DMX value of 0 No collage DMX Values of 126 255 are reserved and default to No collage Value WxH Value WxH Value WxH Value WxH Value WxH C ext els ex 300 1x6 3 te 9 exe 30 13x7 e exe exe 5 exo 103 19x8 a axt exs sa axe 34 wx s is exs s sxa 9 mxi ws x2 s axe o exa se exo amp 132 we 10x3 9 4x8 mea s exs w 6x5 s 5x8 es mxa we 14x5 o ax ow 5xe s 8x6 amp mxs 109 xe to txa os exe 60 exe e x6 m0 Mx7 a axe xt ex7 os nar m tax a axa 9 7x8 ma xt s axa w 7x2 63 exe ma 5x2 ia axa 9 2x7 9x1 9 taxa mu 16x3 is 4x4 w 7x8 os exa 9 taxa ws isxa 3 sa e sx e oxe o taxa ne 16 5 7x4 ies 1 sxe s 4x7 e 0x5 ss tex6 118 15x7 is exs a 7x5 69 oxe o 12x7 m9 16 8 m ss as x7 os exe vo text m exs as 7x6 os mx 121 fex sxa sm 16x39 m 4xs amp 7x7 os nexa v t6x4 m 5x5 ext os isxa 120 16x5 as ext 99 1x8 300 13x56 125 16x6 126 Collage Cell Selection The Collage Cell Selection parameter selects which cell of the grid a particular Axon server or DL fixture will display DMX values O up to 127 are used t
90. 8 MB gt Stock Objects EMM Axon two 12 WM Axon three 13 H Axon four 14 JE All Configuration lt Previous Server Next Server gt Client IP 169 254 72 242 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 241 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA 2 Select a DMX Source type by clicking on mus MX Settin the down arrow of the Source field to aa select DMX512 or Art Net DMX Start Channel n If you select Art Net assign a universe 5ource lArt Net number from 1 16 DMX512 Artnet Subnet TS ArtNet Universe p DMX Protocol v2 s 3 Select a DMX Protocol type by choosing V1 or V2 from the drop down list in the option field and then select the number of Graphic Object layers for your application The Protocol you select is based on how many DMX channels are required for your application For more information on selecting protocol see Protocol Options on page 49 and DMX Settings DMX Settings DMX Start Channel 1 DMX Start Channel Source latNet l Source latNet l Artnet Subnet i Artnet Subnet 1 ArtNet Universe ArtNet Universe 1 DMX Protocol v2 jE DMX Protocol v2 pr Wa ur Pa 4 Edit the DMX Start Channel by entering a valid Start Channel for the protocol type you have chosen For more information on selecting a valid start channel see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 39 242 DLHD Digital Ligh
91. 9 a DV ii dat eunte circo V What You Should Know About Copyright sess mmn vi Chapter 1 Product Overview This chapter describes the features of the DL 3 Digital Light and the Content Management Application software Features isssssssekwewewunawe wu awwuywCkkWERERRAEERRRERRERRRRRRRRRERERREKEERESRRARERANUGARRAARERSAERER KUESEAE 1 e e o A sax 1 Sap eS ING parasol siaaad 2 Content Management Application 51r cr a uis da pu Ke 3 Hardware TEMP TT 3 Related Products and Accessories eeeeeesseeeee nean nnne nan annnm nnns 4 Chapter 2 Setup and Configuration Hardware setup includes mounting connecting to power and establishing Ethernet and DMX links Software setup includes launching the Content Management Application CMA and configuring the fixture for DMX control Hardware Setup ma ERU NE FRVEEESRERUMNAERNRUEEENRESRENREERNS SE EFE 5 Unpacking tne PEUT acorazada ra Uere adr aii adt 5 Hardware Components i orca xp EE didenn bte ad 6 CoOnnechon POTS RR m o A A 6 Patnand TIE LOCKINO sossskssesescetctniunber eadeguep tiki a d adudaud ani AEA D RUP NEU UE 7 Attaching a Power Cord Cap ssssssssssssssssse nenne essen 7 Installing a Line Cord Cap U K Only ssssssse mns 7 Vatic Fitter Heads Information Danmark esses 7 MONEMO Ce a MT TTE 8 geeBiurenami rael ESTE ME 8 Mounting the Fixture DDPIOgHE eoi ecco 49 Exo pa 313013 d OE Qr va Erba ad yere pb ERES RE
92. 922 US 6 570 348 US 6 601 974 US 6 664 745 US 6 775 991 US 6 866 402 US 6 934 071 US 6 988 807 US 7 048 838 US 7 119 902 US 4 701 833 US 5 010 459 US 5 282 121 US 5 426 576 US 5 515 254 US 5 647 662 US 5 769 531 US 5 812 596 US 5 921 659 US 5 980 066 US 6 048 081 US 6 142 653 US 6 241 366 US 6 278 563 US 6 430 934 US 6 538 797 US 6 575 577 US 6 605 907 US 6 682 031 US 6 783 251 US 6 866 451 US 6 937 338 US 6 988 817 US 7 055 963 US 7 161 562 US 4 709 311 US 5 031 078 US 5 307 295 US 5 430 629 US 5 537 303 US 5 691 886 US 5 774 273 US 5 823 661 US 5 934 794 US 5 983 280 US 6 054 816 US 6 172 822 US 6 249 091 US 6 288 828 US 6 459 217 US 6 545 586 US 6 578 991 US 6 617 792 US 6 693 392 US 6 801 353 US 6 869 193 US 6 955 435 US 7 000 417 US 7 055 964 US 7 175 317 US 4 779 176 US 5 073 847 US 5 329 431 US 5 432 691 US 5 545 951 US 5 702 082 US 5 788 365 US 5 825 548 US 5 940 204 US 5 984 248 US 6 057 958 US 6 175 771 US 6 255 787 US 6 326 741 US 6 466 357 US 6 549 324 US 6 588 944 US 6 621 239 US 6 696 101 US 6 812 653 US 6 891 656 US 6 969 960 US 7 011 429 US 7 057 797 US 7 181 112 US 4 800 474 US 5 078 039 US 5 331 822 US 5 454 477 US 5 588 021 US 5 728 994 US 5 794 881 US 5 828 485 US 5 945 786 US 5 986 201 US 6 062 706 US 6 188 933 US 6 256 136 US 6 327 103 US 6 502 961 U
93. But what about public domain material heard that lots of material is in the public domain and can be used for free Once the copyright runs out the creative work falls into the public domain and can be used freely by anyone without payment or licensing If the work is not public domain it is considered literary property The Copyright Act provides substantial penalties for copyright infringement ranging from 10 000 for accidental infringement to 250 000 for willful infringement However contrary to popular belief there really is not that much material in the public domain so this approach will limit you creatively What if want to use a clip in a public performance It s not being filmed or taped Surely don t need permission for that Public gatherings require clearance whenever copyrighted data is projected to audiences or for any use other than just personal viewing Concerts trade shows industrial shows parties and raves are all examples of public performance and permission must be obtained Suppose want to use a still photo or a magazine cover or a television clip Do have to obtain permission for them too Yes they are also copyrighted works whose owners must grant a license for their usage Do need any other permissions to use this material In many cases you do You may need to obtain permission to use the appearance of actors who appear in the clip as well as pay the writers and directors of the film that your cli
94. CMY1 as well Modifier channels for Effect Modes 2 and 3 are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 196 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Mixing Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 51 Use Texture Mixing to mix two media file outputs on one object With this effect you can crossfade the texture media file content from one active Graphic Object to the texture of another Graphic Object When the Texture Mixing effect is selected in the example to the right the media file output of Graphic Object 1 minus applied effects is selected and mixed to Graphic Object 2 with opacity 50 Modifier 1 Selects the Source file for the texture you want to pull A DMX value 1 selects the media content from Graphic Object 1 a value 2 selects from Graphic Object 2 and a value 3 selects from i Graphic Object 3 Modifier 2 Selects the effect level you want to use for the source file A DMX value O selects the original file without effects If effects have been applied to the image A DMX value 1 includes the first applied effect DMX 2 includes the first two effects and DMX 3 includes the first three effects Modifier 3 Adjusts Graphic Object opacity of the source texture from a DMX value of O transparent to 255 10096 fully opaque TIP Use the following steps create a modified Trails effect with the Texture Mixing effect l Select two Graphic Objec
95. Cale aa tiit aix Dan rotos 142 RGB SWap to BORA a 142 RGB SWAP LO BR eses 143 RGB SWaprto OB Risa 144 ROB SWapto EB aceti naaa 145 RGB SWalp TO RBG iia cia 146 S Cati ING recht cre tesa theo rare cancer emer ennai D cn cM A E as s 146 A eat auras dene 147 SON ee ten atleast oo otra 148 SOl SP eec 148 SOl E Late iodo 149 SOL adas adios 149 SONI ZO A re 149 Sota COLORES 150 Transparent Color uni AAA 150 Transparent Color COSO ansiada olaa 150 Transparent Color FING ivi AA 150 Transparent Color Medal astas iaa 150 Transparent Color IVETE a OSA 151 Transparent Color Invert Coarse ooooccccccccccnconnnnnnncnnccnn rr nn nns 151 Transparent Color Invert Medium op 151 Transparent Color nyert PING urag iio 151 UV Elrect ModS OPHONS cascara ato 152 UVO Gray eaten osos a dd 152 UV Selected to Transparent a EAA 153 UV to Transparent piv set crass seve AIR De d ue uu O BUE 153 Y CuMminanee S callo aras 154 Geometric Effect Option sucsicacii nr aa ENRERE ENEE 155 Cartoon Edge t EET 155 Chroma SMITE C EET 156 Curved Surface Correc HON sti da 157 Digital MSpeed and Digital MSpeed 2 on cece ccccce cece cess ene ensem nnns 159 Downward Vertical Streaks evocar di a 160 Drop Shadow T TT EM 161 Edge Frame Prollles sies o o pater ovii a a 162 Framing Shutter EMUlati N uns adan 162 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Pau xi E D m 164 Faux HI ii A Saad 165 AIM BURUNDI aa 166 FIA NOISE cards 167 FIERO eane rre NOISE mE ER
96. Content Files and Folders cccccccccccncnnccnnccnccnnnos 219 Assigning DMX Values to User Content sssssssssssssseee nemen 219 Assigning DMX Values Automatically esses 219 Editing User Content DMX Vall s sisas t Dx eR ER ERR eo e vehe ce cerca iae 220 Vali DMX Vales canas nimiis odi nte dati Re aman a cid Napa cen eUUU DES MuR RI NU ELLE IE 220 Moving User Content Files and Folders o ooooccccccccccccnncnccnnncnnccra mmn nns 221 Downloading Content from a Media Server to Your Local Drive 222 Uploading Content from Your Local Drive to a Media Server 223 Content Scandic turp mune aa etat ds 223 CMAN tera CHON ciie ana eec One 224 Archiving User Content das 226 Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline sssrsssrsssrrrsrrrsrrrerrresrresrne 226 Creating a Local Archive cti aaa 226 Creating Content Backup Archive sss sssesererrrrrerrrerrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrsrrrerrrerrrerne 227 Deploying A Content AFChIVG aa 227 Cloning User Content ciar ecu ei wees no wie we Wale a E V FEEEE ASFENE KENN FER UEE 228 Deleting C ntent i 22 donor ausxvad sau vausxauEEKEcEsdsEdE PaV ENS RRN S ERERNNNP KUNIEEEEREKUNEEEES 229 DMX Summary il 229 Upgrading SoftWare ni Rs ENS 231 Verifying Software VerslOflS i uei etx A VA La veo bebat 231 Upgrading the CMA Software cccccccec cece ee eeee hehehe esser nnns 231 Uparading Server SOWA E anonamata ROM aS Ut a
97. D Translate X Translate Y Translate Z space o Rotation Scaling Position Digital Mspeed MSpeed MSpeed MSpeed Sample Edge Threshold Detected Edge m Keystone Framing Not Color Fade to Not Color Fade to l Not 84 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Adjustment Value Efect Mode NameiDescription oder Modifier Modifier 3 Compress Not Gray Maker2 Brightness Contrast ol l Used Posterizer Mod1 reduces color detail Mod2 Reduces Color contas Not contrast Mod3 not used Detail Used Black amp White Mod1 comparison Mod2 Compalen Not Not not used Mod3 not used p Used Used Fire Gradient Mod1 fade from original image Fade Image to Not Not 112 ito converted image Mod2 not used Mod3 Converted Used Used not used Negative Art Mod1 scales RGB Mod2 Scales Color Not color subtract Mod3 not used RGB Subtract Used Exposure Control Mod1 expand contract Expand Color Shift Not color Mod2 color shift Mod3 not used Contract Color Used Mask Color applies color to mask parameter rden Blue selection 129 Edge Fade Color applies color to Edge Fade Giesen Blue parameter selection Mask Color and Edge Fade Color applies the 130 same color to both the selected Mask and Green Blue Image Edge Fade parameters 131 Background Color selects background color Red Green Blue 132 Background Color Cycle sequences the Red Speed Green Speed Blue Speed background color Edge Fade Pr
98. Every DL 3 DL 2 and Axon media server has a file system that rA E avers 2 servers content that the server uses These files folders and their uu 67626210E 1 associated DMX values are collectively known as the Content d insit E User Objects 2 Stock Media The Content Management Application CMA organizes and Cj Stock Objects holds the movies images and 3 D objects that make up the on the media server identifies content by source preloaded Stock content or custom User content and type Media files or 3 D Object files For more information on using the CMA to view and manage content See Chapter 16 Content Management Application CMA on page 249 Selecting Content Three Parameters control content selection To define an image you have to set DMX values greater than O for the 3 D Object Media Folder and Media File parameters The selected media file will be mapped onto the selected 3 D object To output an image from a media server 1 Open the mechanical iris on the projector by setting its Dimmer parameter to full 100 2 Set the Global Intensity parameter to full 100 3 Set the Object opacity to full 100 4 Adjust the Object Media Folder and Media File parameters to greater than zero DLHD Digital Light User Manual 61 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content When programming with Wholehog software the Media Folder and Object parameters default to l so choosing any
99. F Modea D 1 0 33 0 Fx4 Mode D 1 O 2 0 F D Fi5Mode 0 10 2 0 3 Mask Sel 0 Sia 255 Fade 0 Edge Fade T 0 RO BO LO KeyTopX 0 Y 0 X O Y D Key BttmX YO X 0 Y 0 Key Ratio X 128 Y 128 ClpTopX 0 Y 0 X O Y ClipBttm O Y 0 x 0 Y 0 View Mode 0 View PosX 32758 Y 327658 Z 0260 Entrl Mode Cntr Val 0 Opacity 255 Object 1 Media Dir 1 Media File 19 In Frame Qut Frame 6555 Play Mode a Play Speed 128 Sync Typo o Syne To Vis Mode ind o 2 a Fx1 Moda 1 1 D 3 D 3 Fx2 Mode o 1 o 2 o 3 Fx3 Modo o 1 o z2 o 3 o Rotation X 32768 Scala X 32772 Position X 33599 Y 32768 Z 321768 Y 32768 32768 Y 133095 Z 40059 ee R2 os c 1 41 ego Bono mur 090104 Jauo WW SL oT am 105 XWO zal yan a E our am wes 1 41jeqoto uono miry 090104d Jauo wu say qeu a zal van Li 9341 6 aq bak snowy DLHD Digital Light User Manual 29 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System a Offset RefreshRate 398 Use the Raw sub tab to view the DMX values aj 000 128000 128 000 000 128 128 000 000 O10 250 126 000 DOO DOO 000 000 000 QOO 000 of all fixtures on the link The Raw Tab 020 000 000 255 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 030 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 displays every DMX value for Channels 001 040 000 000 000 000 255 000 600 000 COO 000 T 050 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 QOO 128 128 512 in lines of eight DMX values each per veo 000 000 000 DOO DOO
100. HAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA ArtNet and I O Tab Server Display Connectors Art Net amp I O Info Menu Display Capture Settings Art Net Settings Universe lo Art Net 1 Subnet lo ArtNet Settings Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Art Net Subnet Art Net Universe DLHD Digital Light User Manual 239 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Menu Display Tab Server Display Connectors Art Net amp I O Info Menu Display settings Performance Menu 38 0 3157 0M Display Device DVI DELL U2312HM Resolution 1920x1080 y Refresh Rate 60 0 00 Menu Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Display Device Read Only Performance Configuration Item Configuration Value Options CPU Utilization Gauges display available resources remaining This can help with Available Memory balancing additional layers with the capabilities for the hardware configuration of this device 240 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Configuration Example Before programming a Digital Light fixture or the Axon media server from a DMX512 console you need to e Identify the DMX Source for the fixture Select the Protocol type to determine the DMX channel footprint this fixture will utilize Select a Fixture Number to identify this Axon on the Ethernet link required if you will be synchr
101. L 3 fixtures only Lens Shift Off Centers the image on the fixture available for DL 3 fixtures only Routes the internal camera feed to the SDI card for output to another SDI Output mode DL 3 fixture for projection after the Input from Camera to Graphics Engine has been selected SDI Input mode Routes the SDI input to the capture card CAUTION Do not physically connect both the VGA and the RGBHV connectors at the same time Doing so can damage the projector and void the warranty Lens Shift Engaged DLHD Digital Light User Manual 47 CHAPTER 6 Fixture Motion Functions Using the Internal Projector s Menu To use the native projector menu system under DMX control 1 Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to zero 2 Set the Control parameter DMX value to 182 This will access the projector s main menu 3 Next change the DMX value of the Control panel to zero This command is equivalent to releasing the key on the projector s keypad Failure to release the key will result in unpredictable performance Optional If the projector is mounted on the ceiling flip the display by selecting a Control parameter DMX value from 209 212 4 Set the Dimmer parameter DMX value to 255 100 to view the projector menu s on screen display 5 Adjust the Zoom and Focus parameters to bring the display into focus Now the control parameter s Projector Floor Orientation Projector Ceiling Orientation Projector Front Projection an
102. Light User Manual 155 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Chroma Shift M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 60 This effect shifts the red blue and green component colors in an image You can offset color components vertically and or horizontally Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 5096 no adjustment Values below the midpoint shift the color components right to a maximum at a value of 0 Values above the midpoint shift the color components left to a maximum at a value of 255 10096 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 5096 no adjustment Values below the midpoint shift the color components down to a maximum at a value of 0 Values above the midpoint shift the color components up to a maximum at a value of 255 10096 Modifier 3 Not Used Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 105 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 148 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 0 156 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Curved Surface Correction Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 135 149 Curved Surface Support corrects for shape distortions that occur when you project onto surfaces that aren t flat This Global effect facilitates projecting onto convex or concave cylinders angular screens spheres and disk shaped surfaces m rj LITT p HERE _ You can apply this correction to any media server
103. Longitude Sets Latitude Sets Latitude portion of a sphere s inside surface Angle Angle Center Mattes apply provided mattes over image Matte Effect Matte Pattern Curved Surface Horizontal Convex Oylinder Adjusts Sets Horizontal yim i Not Used corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Centerpoint Curved Surface Horizontal Concave Cylinder Adjusts Sets Horizontal a l l Not Used corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Centerpoint Output Correction Horizontal Convex Corner Adjusts Sets Horizontal Sets Vertical Correction Centerpoint Centerpoint BE C2 Output Correction Horizontal Concave Adjusts Sets Horizontal Sets Vertical Corner Correction Centerpoint Centerpoint Modifier used with global spherical mapping NA NA effect 142 Defaults to O otherwise Modifier used with global spherical mapping NA NA effect 142 Defaults to O otherwise Pan and Scale zooms in and pans across a Horizontal Vertical Zoom in still image position position and out 2 NA NA 144 148 149 154 155 53 254 255 86 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Global Control The Global Control parameter allows access to different global control modes How you set the Global control parameter determines the functionality of the Global Control Modifier parameter Setting this parameter to a DMX value of 255 brings up On screen programming statistics In this case the Global Control Modifier
104. Media File DMX value from 1 35 will display a media loop from the HES Core folder Media Folder 1 wrapped on a Flat Plane Object 1 NOTE The Dimmer Opacity and Global Intensity Parameters all have to be greater than zero before the image you create becomes visible Content Selection Parameters The following sections outline parameters you will use to create an image from content and define its playback You will set the parameters described in this chapter for each individual Graphic Object you define NOTE The suggested default DMX values given for each parameter are recommended to build libraries that provide the easiest and most reliable content selection rendering and output They are the default values built into the Wholehog libraries for High End Systems consoles Object The Object parameter selects the 3 dimensional object component of an image Object files are the 3 D object shapes used to build a total image The graphics engine supports a combined total of 255 stock and user created object files Stock Objects have a fixed DMX value and cannot be edited DMX values 1 149 are reserved for identifying stock object files User created object files must be assigned a unique DMX value from 150 255 For a reference of 3 D object files available as stock content with your media server and infor mation on how to create your own object files go to the link for the Stock Object Guide for the DL 3 DL 2 and Axon products on http
105. Menu screen NOTE You can access most Menu options through the CMA see Content Management Application CMA on page 209 You can also remotely control certain options via a DMX console using the Control channel see Control Function Options on page 46 Menu Panel Components Multidirectional navigation button Active Screen displays the currently selected Display XH am ral ow apy ws Version hd Start Layers Ea Channel v2 MES Fixture Ib 1 1 Menu Display Adjustments not available on some models Projector Tab Select Buttons The LCD screen displays the menu system arranged with a series of Menu Tabs along the side for accessing configuration screens and options on the currently active screen Clicking on one of the Tab Select buttons selects the screen tab next to it The large Multidirectional Navigation button controls movement between fields Use the Menu button right of the Navigation button to access the Menu system or to cancel a selection The Enter button left of the Navigation button selects and stores a selection DLHD Digital Light User Manual 21 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Functionality for the Menu and Enter buttons automatically reverses when the fixture is rotated to keep operation consistent You can also manually set this option see Display Options on page 31 The fields in the Active Screen display current set
106. Mode Options Descriptions Downward Vertical Streaks M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 80 This effect lets you convert a portion of the image into vertical streaks You can also rotate the angle of the streak and fade from the original image to the image with the streak effect applied Modifier 1 At a DMX value of O there is no effect Increasing the DMX value sets the length of the streak portion of the image from the bottom up to 255 100 the full image converted to streaks Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the edge of the streaked portion of the image clockwise as you approach O 90 Values above the midpoint move the edge of the streaked portion of the image counterclockwise as you approach 90 at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 When Modifier 1 has a DMX value gt 0 Modifier 3 lets you fade from O the original image to 255 100 the converted image Original content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 170 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 158 Modifier 3 parameter DMX value 255 160 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Drop Shadow Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 58 This effect creates a black plane behind the selected media file texture on a flat rectangular object You can bring the plane from behind positioning it to form a drop shadow You wo
107. Objec E M AxonHDTG 75 Fixture ID 3 o po AxonHDProTG 100 Warp Edit off Number All Configuration lt Previous Server Next Server gt Client IP 10 10 0 24 Select a Source WU em Server Display Connectors Art Net amp yo Info Menu Display 1 Select a DMX Source type by clicking DMX Settings on the down arrow of the Source field Output 1 Source DMX512 v Protocol hd y Layers 10 y Fixture ID 2 v2 E Warp Edit DLHD Digital Light User Manual 17 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Set the Channel range Server Display Connectors Art Net amp 1 O Info Menu Display 2 Select a DMX Protocol type by 0 DMX Settings choosing hd from the drop down list in o i i utput 1 salad and en Hs number of Stat banal Identify raphic ects you want to use in your P l J y d Source DMx512 y application 3 Select the number of Graphic Object o Layers 10 Layers required for your application in Fixture ID v2 the drop down field next to the protocol Warp Edit Number 1 4 Enter a valid Start Channel in the Start Channel field DLHD Channel Range and Valid Start Channel a Fixture Range Last Valid Start Channel ae NENNEE NENNEN 111 01 46 91 36 81 426 471 _ For more information see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 39 18 DLHD Digital Light U
108. Opacity Projector Input Self Test Zoom v Disk Queue DMX Protocol Projector Input Selection by DMX Tilt Invert v DMX Start Channel DMX Source Projector Lamp Unique Number Iw Fixture ID External SVideo Format Projector Lamp Mode Windows XPe Version v Fixture Name Firmware Version Projector OSD Menu v IP Address Fixture Defaults Projector Rear v Lamp Hours Fixture Hours Projector Type Iv Model Home Motion Projector Zoom Override Enable v Software Version Pan Invert Projector Zoom Value v Art Net Subnet PanTilt Swap Secondary Display Parameters v Art Net Universe Primary Display Parameters Self Test Focus Data Loss Timeout Iris Projector Ceiling Self Test Iris Disk Free Space Projector Defaults Self Test Pan Tilt Display Invert Projector Focus Override Enable Self Test Video Cancel Re Order Columns You also have the option to change the order that the columns are displayed Left click on the head of the column you wish to move hold down the mouse button and drag the column to the desired position Releasing the mouse button will move that column to the new location Viewing Individual Fixture Configuration Values To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuratio
109. PM On_The_Wall_Studic Bubblescape HD mpg mpg 8 48 930 KB 1024 768 481 24 0 20 4 no 2 19 2008 6 27 43 PM Sean_Bridwell 6 7 Color Sine HD mpg mpa 9 21 972 KB 1024 768 300 30 0 10 0 no 2 19 2008 6 27 46 PM A Luna Blue 7 E Colored Crust HD mpg mpg 10 75 358 KB 1024 768 926 30 0 30 86 no 2 19 2008 6 27 55 PM E Feedback Video 8 E Controls HD mpa mpa 11 27 992 KB 1024 768 344 30 0 11 46 no 2 19 2008 6 27 58 PM HES_Texture 9 E Deep Down mpg mpg 12 87 890 KB 640 480 1800 30 1 0 0 no 2 19 2008 6 31 44 PM HES Foliage 10 E Digital Multi Calor HD mpg mpa 13 93 325 KB 1024 768 1127 30 0 37 56 no 2 19 2008 6 31 51 PM HES_Religious 11 E Digital Sine HD mpa mpg 14 24 414 KB 1024 768 300 30 0 10 0 no 2 19 2008 6 31 54 PM HES Gothic 12 E Disco Ball mpg mpa 15 17 578 KB 640 480 360 30 012 0 no 2 19 2008 6 31 56 PM HES Digital Aerials 7 Dunes HD mpg mpg 16 93 751 KB 1024 768 1152 30 0 38 40 no 2 19 2008 6 32 49 PM C HES Theme Stils 1 Dust Dia HD mpg mpg 17 78 287 KB 1024 768 962 30 0 32 6 no 2 19 2008 6 46 23 PM O Apollo Glass 15 E Explosion mpa mpa 18 2 999 KB 640 480 62 30 0 2 6 no 2 19 2008 6 32 54 PM os Ne i E Eye Cultures Fades HD mpg mpg 19 34 863 KB 800 600 504 30 0 16 80 no 2 19 2008 6 32 57 PM gt Bence q ml 4 E Fast Car Commute mpg mpg 20 187 255 KB 640 480 3540 30 1 58 0 no 2 19 2008 6 33 13 PM a Amaha Di qu E Flip Clock HD mpg mpa 21 3 665 KB 1024 768 53 30 0 1 76 no 2
110. Projector Defaults Projector Defaults External leet External Chooses the input the Projector will accept Input Internal Vac Selecting Yes allows projector s input source to Projector In be selected from DMX by DMX No Disables changing projector input via DMX Displays content file locations and allows a content preview see page 36 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 25 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Main Sub Tabs Fields Monitors lamp hours of operation Selecting H Reset button reverts hours to 0 ours Monitors fixture hours of operation Selecting Reset button reverts hours to 0 Info IP Address Displays fixture s IP address Projector Type Displays projector model Video Adaptor Displays video adaptor card model Motion Shutdown Displays system activity and errors For more Status Projector Status information see Chapter 17 Maintenance Projector Air Filter and Troubleshooting on page 263 Software Version Displays currently installed versions Pan Encoder Version Tilt Encoder Version Version Unique ID Displays the unit s factory assigned ID number Displays a currently assigned Fixture Name Motherboard Video Adapter Identifies the currently loaded hardware Hardware Projector Type SDI Capture Motion All Clicking the Home button resets all mechanical functions to default positions Home Clicking the Calibrate button recalibrates Calibrate Motors motors to correct misstepping or after
111. R eae 168 ED Aussie Dev T 169 PUTA nao 170 Gaussian BUS o 171 Galssiab Palo animated 172 Horizontal MIEEOE Srila dad 173 I rage Scale and ROSTE usse pron a Pat ple soc 174 LenS GIG TTE 175 Magnitving LENS ia A AR AAA AA 176 Mad LENS Cre 177 Mates ntc oie 178 Pall al iS Cala AT 180 Particle NS A rut dev MEM d Ua HL LUE CDU M DC toutes 181 Particio SyS teni Lo dci acia aede gates 181 Palticle SVSEBITICZ ei uu aoeene ne 183 Particle SVSEBITI 3 nado 183 PICEUFS TR ICCO Bench de dba a A o i Raid 184 Prerotation Translation xicecivoriaaaduste utm du ard d P bCOS CE PCEBO DU UN Ea Pici dd dh iee FVba ici Des 185 PIS aa 186 PDC TWIST A AAA same caduta do 187 PS Didi on 188 REMOTO rr a 189 Scene RAN Ge aare aN E ae E ts DIE EUM eE 190 SHAKENBAKE amaia 191 Sine Wave ECU asada 192 Sinewave Circular w X Axis Wobbulation ccccoccccccccccccccncanaranc mmm 192 Sinewave Circular w Y Axis Wobbulation cece cece cece e cece ee mmm 192 Sinewave Circular w Z Axis Wobbulation cccccccccccccccncccncana canarios 192 SINGWav er Horizontal riada aa 192 Sinewave Horizontal w X Axis Wobbulation em 192 Sinewave Horizontal w Y Axis Wobbulation seen 192 Sinewave Horizontal w Z axis Wobbulation mmm 192 Sinewave Vertical ara daa cdas 193 Sinewave Vertical w X Axis Wobbulation oocccccccccccccccccccnncannnnn rn 193 Sinewave Vertical w Y Axis Wobbulation
112. REFEERAREARARSFREKAKRARGSEERKNR FERME 45 FOCUS E S S S S E 45 LI nooo DEC DLE olaa 45 MSpeed Motor Speed iia 46 Control Function ODUIOnS inicia aaa UE ERA 46 Fixture Operations serseri Per 46 PFOIECLOR COntrO ls aaa 47 Control Parameter Projector Options oococcoccccccccncncnnannnnnncnnnncn anar rra 47 Using the Internal Projector s Menu cccccceccccecee cece sees eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeannenenees 48 Chapter 7 Graphics Engine Overview DLHD DL 3 and AxonHD Media servers use virtually the same graphic engine software to control content selection and playback as well as 3 D Object and Global manipulation Protocol QDUONS A aba 49 Image Optimizing Controls coiococococaacananananenencacnanananaco REPE RHRSERRRRRARRRRRRRRRRRANRE 49 Graphics Control Hierarchy i uosesstvaueusess buo RERURERERESEREEUERRRRAPENERERRSEPEEERREN PESE ENSE 49 Graphics Engine FUhcHOb PIOW x eter tide oen ora Lau SER dade tator ura ets 50 Graphics Engine Functions sseeereeeuanee rn 51 ObjecE GrFaphic TE WCU ONS scan darias 51 Global la A adu Thamar cebakeuae nt neos atks satione dite debe Posse tu ue 51 Making Graphics Effect Choices c o00mccccoconnnncccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnrrnnannanas 51 Chapter 8 Graphic Functions You can adjust opacity black level contrast and apply a variety of color mixing and geometric effects to each individual Graphic Object OD ACIEY issisriiicic a ERR RS 53 I mage Opt
113. S 6 549 326 US 6 592 480 US 6 622 053 US 6 719 433 US 6 823 119 US 6 894 443 US 6 971 764 US 7 018 047 US 7 073 910 US 7 206 023 US D347 113 US D350 408 US D359 574 US D360 404 US D365 165 US D366 712 US D370 080 US D372 550 US D374 439 US D377 338 US D381 740 US D409 771 AT E169413 CA 2142619 CA 2145508 CA 2245842 DE 22588 4 08 DE 621495 DE 655144 DE 69320175 4 DE 69322401 0 DE 69331145 2 DE 69525856 7 DE 69734744 3 DE 797503 DK 0655144 DK 1447702 EP 0475082 EP 0621495 EP 0655144 EP 0662275 EP 0767398 EP 0797503 EP 0969247 EP 1447702 ES 0621495 FR 0621495 FR 0655144 FR 0662275 FR 1447702 GB 2043769B GB 2055842B GB 2283808B GB 2290134B GB 2291814B GB 2292530B GB 2292896B GB 2294909B GB 2295058B GB 2303203B GB 2306887B GB 2307036B GB 2316477B IE 0621495 IT 034244BE 2005 IT 0621495 IT 0655144 JP 3495373 JP 3793577 NL 0621495 NL 0797503 NL 0969247 UK 0621495 UK 0655144 UK 0662275 UK 0797503 UK 0969247 UK 1447702 li DLHD Digital Light User Manual Declaration of Conformity according to ISO IEC Guide 22 and EN45104 Manufacturer s name High End Systems Inc Distributor s name High End Systems Inc Distributor s address 2105 Gracy Farms Lane Austin Texas 78758 USA Declares that the product Product Name DL Product Number All Product Options All conforms to the following EEC directives 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC 89 336 EEC as amen
114. T PROFITS SUSTAI NED OR INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PRODUCT OR CAUSED BY PRODUCT DEFECTS OR THE PARTIAL OR TOTAL FAILURE OF ANY PRODUCT REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE WAS FORESEEN OR UNFORESEEN Warranty is void if the product is misused damaged modified in any way or for unauthorized repairs or parts This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights specific to your locality DLHD Digital Light User Manual V What You Should Knou About Copyright The following FAQ can help you understand copyright laws and how they apply to content used with the DLHD DL 3 DL 2 Axon and Axon HD media servers By Suzy Vaughan Associates for High End Systems I want to use a film clip from When Harry Met Sally in a promotional piece advertising my services What do I have to do to be able to do that First of all you need to obtain permission to use the clip from its owners The clip is considered intellectual property just as though it were your car or some software code developed by and belonging to Microsoft This is because the U S Copyright Act gave creators of literary works which include books films television programs art works still photos and musical compositions and recordings the right to sell or license these works and to make money from them for the period of the copyright
115. TE The Tiling effect implemented on Effect 1 overrides tiling on both Effect 2 and Effect 3 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 251 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 97 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 201 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Transparent Wipes M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 33 Transparent wipes let you open one graphic to reveal another graphic behind it You can select Rectangle wipes from from six options and the 1 42 center out horizontally centerline of the effect Modifier 1 Adjusts the area of Rectangle wipe from 43 84 edges out horizontally the wipe from the smallest at a value of O to the largest at a value Wipes from center out of 255 100 85 126 vertically Modifier 2 Selects the center of a wipe effect s separation Modifier 3 Selects the wipe Wipes from edges out 127 170 vertically option Each option occupies a Cross shape wipes from portion of the DMX value range 171 219 center out see table at right Box shape wipes from 212 255 edges outward 202 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Zoom Blur M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 59 Zooms into a position on the image with a mult image blurring effect You can control the position of the zoom center on the image Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 5096 no
116. User Content that can be restored to any media server Using Local Archives to Prepare Content Offline You can create a Local Archive of files stored on your hard drive to be deployed to a server at another time This lets you work on organizing files for a specific show offline and then upload it to a server at a later date Creating a Local Archive To create a Local Archive Create Local Content Archive Wizard 1 Under the File menu HIGH END SYSTEMS select Create Local Archive to launch the EE AA archiving wizard E E Seng 1 z Ad Media Folder C Documenta and Settings mati 2 Click on Add Media C Dbcumenis ad S z Documents end Settings meti CADocumente and 5 lt Add Media C Dacumerfe and Settings malti Folder This will add a sn UE EC Documer s and Settings umat Song 2 DOC PI i C Dacumernts and Setlings malt media folder to the left Bong 3 EE CADocumenta and Seltinge wall hand column named etis ad Add Objects gt MyMedia0 Each z Remove Objects gt successive media folder will be named MyMedial MyMedia2 and so forth You can rename these folders with a single click on the folder name 3 After creating a folder and renaming it if you wish highlight the folder to add media files 4 Click Add Media This will bring up a file browser window that will allow you to navigate to the spot on your hard drive containing the media you want to add You can
117. a server is connected to an ethernet network it sends out Discovery messages These messages are received by other media servers on the link as well as the CMA software The messages contain information that allows the media servers to communicate with each other and the CMA to communicate with all the units on the network The CMA window will display the IP Address Fixture ID the Media Server software version and the server model Fixtures derive their IP addresses through a router or automatic IP assignment Fixture Identification The Fixture ID is a unique number used in the control protocol to identify specific fixtures for sychronization functions For more information on Sychronization content playback see Chapter 10 Graphic Functions Synchronizing Content on page 109 NOTE Toensure that sychronization works properly each DL 3 DL 2 or Axon media server should be assigned a unique fixture ID DLHD Digital Light User Manual 211 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA The CMA Client Window The CMA Client Window provides views of the content and configuration for all DL 3 DL 2 and Axon servers connected to the Ethernet network in the Left pane Information is displayed in the right pane for any item selected Access options through the menus at the top of the window or by right clicking in the right pane NOTE You cannot drag folders or files between the left and right panes of the CMA window File
118. able through the Content Management Application CMA see Viewing Server Configuration on page 276 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 13 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Software Setup Software setup for DLHD fixtures requires the following steps 1 After powering on the DLHD media server launch the CMA software 2 Check the software version installed and upgrade if necessary 3 Configure the DLHD fixture s DMX source DMX protocol and DMX Start Channel Installing and Launching the Content Management Application CMA The Content Management Application software that shipped on CD with your fixture communi cates remotely with all DLHD DL 2 and Axon media servers over an Ethernet network to Upload and download custom digital content to fixtures e Remotely control all menu commands Update software Axon media servers can run the CMA directly If your fixture network is linking DL 3 and DLHD fixtures only you will need to run the CMA on a computer connected to the Ethernet link you have established The following are the minimum hardware requirements for a remote computer running the CMA e Windows XP Vista Windows 7 32 and 64 bit e Microsoft Framework 2 0 or later 100 1000 base Ethernet card a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content uploading of large files After setting up an Ethernet network and linking all DLHD fixtures and your computer insert the CD that shipped with your fixture to
119. ace contact screw s in the appropriate position NOTE When installing a replacement driver board on a module always place a star washer between an address screw and the pad on the logic board to ensure good electrical contact yA 5 Carefully replace the rear bezel making sure to place but do not force the gasket over the lamp cover located on the back of the projector 6 Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface Select Calibrate Motors through the Test_Home menu screen and leave the fixture undisturbed for 10 minutes while calibration occurs DLHD Digital Light User Manual 273 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board To replace motor driver board located in the fixture base housing L Disconnect power to the fixture If the fixture has been operating allow the fixture to cool before handling Loosen the two phillips head screws on menu display panel side of the Box cover Loosen screws on menu display panel and gently open away from the fixture leaving the harness cabling attached The driver board for pan functions and fans is located directly behind the display 5 After detaching all cabling pull board out and replace Ensure that the fixture is on a solid surface CAUTI ON The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws are missing from driver boards Reattach cables Replace the side panel and top cover Make sure yo
120. add single files or multiple files To add multiple files hold down shift and select multiple media files with your mouse 5 Click Add Objects if you wish to add custom 3 D objects to the archive This will again bring up a file browser window to navigate to your 3 D objects Any 3 D objects added will appear in the right hand column of the wizard 3 D objects do not get added to folders 6 Click Next at the bottom of the wizard This will take you to another screen where you choose where to save and what to name your archive 7 Click Browse to navigate to where you want to save and name your archive 8 Click Next Your archive will then be created NOTES The Remove Media and Remove Object buttons can be used to remove media files and objects from the wizard when creating the archive 226 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Currently the archive will not be created unless each media folder created has at least one media file in it All media folders files and objects will be assigned DMX addresses in alphabetical fashion Creating Content Backup Archive Backups are created using the Content Archive feature An Content Archive file is a compressed file containing all the User Content from a single fixture along with the assigned DMX values for folders and files To create a Content Archive 1 In the CMA Client Window select All Server in the left pane 2 Select the Server wit
121. age You can control the horizontal and vertical frequency Modifier 1 Adjusts random horizontal shake from the shortest refresh rate at a value O to to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts random vertical shake from the shortest refresh rate at a value O to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts how much the image is allowed to move from a minimum at a DMX value of O to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Tip To get the maximum effect set a high value for Modifier 3 and low values for Modifiers 1 and 2 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 191 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sinewave Circular M Object Effect Global Effect Sinewave Circular w X Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 64 Sinewave Circular w Y Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 65 Sinewave Circular w Z Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 66 These effects create a circular sinewave pattern and then vary the boundaries of the underlying object along the designated axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximu
122. al Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 102 Rotation parameters rotate the center of an image around the x y or z axis The Prerotation Translation Effect Mode option allows you to position the image in a virtual 3 dimensional space Then when the Rotation parameters for the object are applied the image will orbit around each axis from this new position NOTE When this option is applied as a Global effect it will include any prerotation translation selected as an Object effect Modifier 1 Moves the horizontal position of the image centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the picture from O smallest to 255 100 largest DLHD Digital Light User Manual 185 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Pixelate M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 54 This effects divides the image into rectangles using the center pixel color of each box as its color You can control the number of boxes and adjust the vertical and horizontal dimensions Modifier 1 Controls the number of divisions Fewer larger boxes will also result in reduced color variations Modifier 2 Reduces the box size horizontally to centerpoint from O no reduction to 255 100 full reduction At that point the image will then be c
123. al Light fixture merges video projection and automated lighting technologies with a DMX controllable digital media server housed in a moving yoke fixture The built in 32 bit Graphics Engine utilizes Windows XP Embedded and DirectX application programming interface to provide extensive image control of multiple 3 D graphic objects DLHD fixtures use the DMX512 protocol to control hardware functions like pan tilt as well as graphic control of the internal media server Media control functions include loading images and movies and mapping them onto 3 D graphical objects The internal graphics engine lets you manipulate position scale and rotation apply visual effects and color mix each graphic object You can create and control up to nine of these objects and then apply global effects to the composite image A DLHD fixture provides an extensive library of over 1500 high resolution lighting optimized video and still images The Collage Generator feature allows you to create seamless vertical horizontal or central panoramic media projections using multiple Axon AxonHD DL 3 and DLHD units controlled from a lighting console Using multiple digital lighting fixtures allows you to increase effective screen luminance The Content Management Application CMA software runs on your workstation or laptop computer and communicates with other DLHD fixtures as well as DL 3 fixtures and Axon media servers over an Ethernet network The CMA lets you remotely
124. an Ethernet network Uploads and downloads custom digital content to fixtures on a DMX link Configures DLHD DL 3 DL 3F DL 2 Axon HD and Axon media servers Updates software including content applications and operating system to DL 3 DL 3F DL 2 and Axon media servers Three gas gauges in the server s Hardware Tab let you view available CPU GPU and HDD resources remaining This gives you the information you need to manage additional layers within the capabilities of the hardware available in their system Log File Download available in All Servers view in the CMA to provide troubleshooting information to customer service if a problem occurs Logs are saved with a dlf digital log file extension Hardware Full color display and menu functions Mechanical lens shift 107 vertical to supplement software keystone correction Powered by an Intel Core i5 3 4 Ghz processor with 2 GB DDR3 RAM a 256 Gv SanDisk solid state hard drive AMD Radeon HD7750 video card and a BlackMagic Decklink SDI HD capture card Gigabit Ethernet for fast content uploading and multiple fixture synchronization Mounting system provides multiple orientation options Advanced filtration system reduces overall fixture noise Sanyo PCL HP7OOOL projector Nine Motion Parameters for mechanical fixture control include Mechanical Iris adjustment to full black out 400 degree Pan and 240 degree Tilt movement DMX control of projector zoom and f
125. an be easily moved between fixtures or between your local drive and fixtures Which method you use depends on How much content you want to move e What existing server content you want to preserve e Whether the client machine is currently connected to the Ethernet fixture link f you want to maintain currently assigned content identification DMX values There are several methods for moving User content files and media folders between media servers to your local drive e Drag and Drop Copy and Paste commands Cloning transfers the User Content files and their DMX value assignments from one media server to one or more server s on the fixture network Creating a Content Archive Deploying a Content Archive Use the following table to determine the best method for your situation Transfer Type Fixture Network From Server From Client Between File Transfer Method to Client Machine to Networked Machine Server s Server s Drag and Drop Yes Yes if format is valid for the destination folder Copy and Paste Yes Yes N P MN O Does NOT preserve DMX Values Preserves DMX values and Deploying a Content N Yes Replaces any previous User Archive Content on destination drive Creating a Content Archive Yes No Saves assigned DMX values when creating archive from content on a fixture No O Yes No No DLHD Digital Light User Manual 221 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Downloading Content from a
126. ard When an error is found the CMA will not allow this content to be loaded on to a server at all A dialog will describe the issue and after dismissing the dialog you will find the specific file has not been loaded onto the server DLHD Digital Light User Manual 223 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA CMA Interaction When you drag a content Copy Files Progress file or folder on to a server a dialog shows the l HIGH END SYSTEMS progress of the file copy process If there is Copying 4 files 4 4 LLL 0058 breakdown solo mpg 10 6660 61 506 KB nothing wrong with the content it copies to the fixture EESOSA BERERE If warnings or errors are File Path Description found the CMA compiles gs C Documents and Seth missing MPEG 2 sequence the list of issues in the d Documents and Setti sequence extensions aut o bottom half of the Copy iy Documents and Setti sequence end code missing Be Cancel NOTE Since the CMA executes the scanning copying process for the entire group of folders files in a single operation it will not stop or pause during the process to dismiss the errors Files Progress dialog LA CA Documents and Seth movie not l frame only After the process has finished the dialog will Copy Files Progress indicate the number of P issues that it found and a HIGH END SYSTEMS listing of the affected files After viewing the list click on
127. ation CMA 4 Press the Create Table button on the screen to build the summary table DmxWValues Windows Internet Explorer G lid ad us syFagesjDuoc olaes apa T Elia x NH coge LE e D E Y dese Yom titan Ear Y A Oamn Sug Favorites es M sugested Sites gt E Web Sice Gallery f Daues E E om Pape Safety y Took iy Press the button to display a table of DMX values for all the content on this media server If there is a lot of content this could take a while or ee ee in viis a a PA pestei Oe EA Ji bes Ins e re 230 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Upgrading Software Upgrade Management lets you upgrade the media server application and system firmware Verifying Software Versions Running the latest version of both the CMA software Fle Servers en and the media server s Highend WebSite i E DLI Maral High End Systems Content Management Application software will ensure that ATT VOD a Reet 5 5 A Snn SeneriD Seven ET performance from the Bo Te B Done Ese 1 34 T LED User Media o rm E um fixtures on your network 5 Syne test files 40 8 ru Zar 1n 2 ana K tad To verify the CMA version select About from the Help drop down menu The media server Software version is displayed for each server on the network in the All Servers view NOTE Although running different versions of soft
128. automatically install the CMA on your hard drive For more information on CMA operation see Chapter 16 Content Management Application CMA on page 249 NOTE Ifthe CMA doesn t automatically launch navigate to the CMA msi file in your Windows browser and double click to launch When you launch the CMA it automatically finds and identifies all DLHD DL 3 fixtures and Axon media servers connected to the fixture link HIGH END SYSTEMS E Al Servers 6 servers Server ID Server Name x B 0018F305430F 1 00111140BFD7 10 2 102 20 1 33 1308 DL2 cB 001111406FD7 1 Axon One 10 2 102 21 1 3 1 1208 Axon DES Im DL 2 Four 10 2 102 24 1341331 DL2 Ta m del e 0018F30543DF 10 2 102 27 1 3 4 1331 DL2 eee pa DL 2 Two 10 2 102 26 1 3 4 1331 DL2 O Eolica Axon Two 10 2 102 23 13 4 1331 Axon 14 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration NOTE To avoid problems with fixture communication over the Ethernet link disable all firewall programs on your computer when using the CMA Verifying and Upgrading Fixture and CMA Software Fixture and CMA software are continuously being updated to increase performance and add new features The software loaded on your fixture may not be the most up to date The latest fixture and CMA software are always available at the High End Systems website CMA software version is noted upon installation and can be accessed after that under the File menu The CMA All Servers vie
129. aximum jitter Modifier 3 Reduces the noise level from 0 maximum noise to 255 100 no noise Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 157 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 94 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 26 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 167 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Film Roll M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 53 This effect scrolls the media file texture horizontally or vertically independent from the 3 D object it overlays and allows you to control the scrolling speed and image scaling Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scroll left increasing in speed as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint scroll right increasing in speed to 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scroll down increasing in speed as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint scroll up increasing in speed to 255 100 Modifier 3 Scales the image from 0 no adjustment to maximum tiling at 255 168 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Flip M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 83 This effect flips the media file texture horizontally or vertically independent from the 3 D object it overlays Modifier 1 DMX values from 0 127 have no effect DMX values of 128 50 to 255 100 flips the image horizo
130. be chosen as the master This will ensure that all of the servers have the ability to playback content as well as the master server Sync To Parameter Once you have chosen your master server the Sync To parameter must be set on all of the slave servers This parameter is found on the first Global Layer of each server The Sync To parameter is set to a value equal to the Fixture ID of your master server For example if your master server has a fixture ID of 3 all of the slave servers should have their Sync To parameter on Global Layer 1 set to 3 Sync Mode Parameter DMX Default Value 0 no sync mode selection Next set the Sync Mode parameter to its appropriate value These are for synchronizing movie playback on any Graphic Object If all Graphic Object 1s need to synchronize together set the Sync Type parameter on all Graphic Object 1s of the slave servers to Graphic Object 1 The same goes for synchronizing all of Graphic Objects 2 9 It is possible to synchronize Graphic Object 1 to Graphic Object 3 etc as long as all of the appropriate parameters are set correctly NOTE Unlike the Sync To parameter Sync Mode does function on all graphic object layers and must be set in order for Synchronization to function correctly on that particular layer 206 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 14 synchronizing Content When using the Sync Mode parameter keep the following in mind e Any Sync Mode value above 45 46 255 de
131. ber 2 global and user number 3 11 graphic fixture types DMX Output Display Formats Although all lighting consoles output the same 512 DMX channels per universe the on screen labeling often differs Parameter functions are displayed in either alpha numeric descriptions strobe 1 percentage 0 100 or decimal 0 255 for 8 bit and 0 65535 for 16 bit Consult your lighting console manual for further information DLHD Digital Light User Manual 41 CHAPTER 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Wholehog Programming Notes Play Speed You can adjust the Play Speed using the encoder wheel on the Beam parameter of the Graphic fixture type Additionally you can press Enable and select Media Speed Default On to revert to the default speed setting with a DMX value 128 50 Then if you touch the encoder again the previous play speed will be recalled Mask Strobe A unique function of the Wholehog library system allows the creation of a special encoder type Flying Pig Systems has created a parameter called mask strobe in the Global fixture type When this is adjusted it will automatically change the DMX value of the mask select channel to the appropriate value and adjust the DMX channel for the strobe speed This will override the Mask Edge parameter defined in the DL 3 or DL 2 DMX Protocol Play Modes Opacity Using the Graphic fixture type press the Mode button to view the play mode options By default all modes trigg
132. c Reuse dele etn CA RES UL 231 Viewing Server Configuration 4 12222 eoa nana uir ana RR RREZARR XGREXXRNRRZaR EE MEEEEN EE 233 Viewing Current Configuration of All Servers 0occccccccncnnncncnccncnnn nn nnn 233 Configuring Collis 425 iS bed e pU T Resiidu S RC Od ad 234 Re Order COMMIS susto 234 Viewing Individual Fixture Configuration Values ooooocccccccccccconnnnncnnnnnccnnn nn noo 234 DLHD Digital Light User Manual xix AxonHD Media Server Configuration Options eere 235 Server Tap vivit Sia dbebt a x ix dea ra 235 OMX SEMOS tuerca dictan a inate 235 Displav ConnectoLs Tabs a iO 236 Display CONNECtorS sir cd sl 236 Retour 237 SENET TIO rias AAA c ees x OE GA CM URS E OCC REN CAR 237 VEESIO NINO Suiocdcteusatdutatt opta dL aa ea es ER DU a 237 Haraware lara aaa 237 Miscelaneos sisi aio 238 ArtNetauad7 O Tab ss A TRES SOR OE 239 ANCE SENOS Ecc 239 Menu DIS Play WT abe lao N r O 240 A n E E E E E E E E AA 240 Perron ALICE Mara ES E 240 Configuration Example aiii aa 241 Chapter 16 CMA Warp Editor User Warps are applied globally to modify the output display shape This chapter describes the Warp Editor and includes a step by step example for creating a custom warp graphic object OVerVIOGW iiisssenwveuwseuavuuuunuwuEERWRRVEFFAEENFFRVIFZENNENNI ieee ENKRTN KE aa i RN REDI REN 243 Functi nal OperatlOh 2 ivan ive vana v veu up sus as eeux aa 243 Warp Editing Screen i 2
133. can use the three associated Modifier parameters to adjust the effect The behavior of the Modifier parameters depends upon the selected effect For a general information on Graphics Control features see Graphics Engine Overview on page 49 For a table of Graphic Effects see Effect Mode Parameters on page 62 For a table of Global Effects see Global Effect Mode Channels on page 114 NOTE Both Object and Global Effect parameters include effects for swapping colors to provide quick color conversions Use the following DMX Values in any of the Effect parameters to make these color conversions Red gt Red meer Blue gt Blue 7 17 18 19 41 Blue gt Red 42 43 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 107 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Effect Mode Color Options All or Nothing Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 15 This effect reduces all color values to full saturation or no color based on comparison to a set threshold This effect creates an image with fully saturated color Modifier 1 Compares the red component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Modifier 2 Compares the green component of a pixel to the threshold value and converts it to full color if it is greater than the threshold and to black if it is below the threshold Modifier 3 Compares the blue component
134. ce from 128 to 255 10096 white A DMX value of 64 allows you to view the image at a minimum luminance Modifier 2 Scales the x chrominance component The default DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scale the x chrominance component down as you approach 0 minimum Values above the midpoint up to a maximum at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Scales the y chrominance component The default DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Values below the midpoint scale the y chrominance component down as you approach O minimum Values above the midpoint scale the y chrominance component up to a maximum at a value of 255 10096 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 250 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 128 154 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Geometric Effect Options Cartoon Edge Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 38 Outlines the edges of image components to create a rendered effect Modifier 1 Adjusts Color reduction from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts contrast enhancement from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Adjusts ion sensitivity from 02 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 82 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 115 DLHD Digital
135. cord cap according to the following code Connect the green and yellow core to the plug terminal marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow Connect the blue core to the terminal marked with the letter N or coloured black e Connect the brown core to the terminal marked with the letter L or coloured red WARNI NG Class 1 equipment This equipment must be earthed Vatic Fitter Heads Information Danmark Advarsel Beskyttelse mod elektrisk chock DLHD Digital Light User Manual 7 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Lederne med gul groen isolation maa kun tilsluttes en klemme maerket i Mounting the Fixture You can mount DLHD fixtures suspended from a support system such as a truss or freestanding on its base WARNING Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture CAUTI ON Always use a secondary safety cable when mounting this fixture Fixture must be installed and operated by trained personnel only Maintain a minimum focus distance of 1 4 meters from a 14 M combustible object A Do not mount on a flammable surface As pa NOTE Due to the wide variety of possible lighting designs High End Systems cannot make specific mounting recommendations Consider the following procedure as a suggested guideline only Fog Machine Warning Like all high quality video projection units the DLHD fixture must be
136. cted the Particle System 1 and 2 effects you can further adjust the effect with this option Modifier 1 Sets the Initial Particle Velocity from O slowest to 255 100 fastest Modifier 2 Sets the particle rotation A DMX value of 128 50 no rotation Values above the midpoint rotate counterclockwise from 129 slowest to 255 100 fastest Values below the midpoint rotate clockwise from O fastest to 127 slowest Modifier 3 Sets the particle lifetime from O shortest to 255 100 longest DLHD Digital Light User Manual 183 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Picture in Picture M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 35 This effect creates a window in the image containing a scaled down version of the same image and then lets you position it anywhere on the output plane Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the subpicture s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the picture from O smallest to 255 100 largest Original Content Modifier parameter 1 DMX value 176 Modifier parameter 2 DMX value 76 Modifier parameter 3 DMX value 133 184 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Prerotation Translation Y Object Effect MGlob
137. ctor Down arrow Projector Left arrow Projector Right arrow Store Menu selection Projector Floor Orientation These commands activate the projector s setting for specific mounting or projection alternatives Projector Ceiling Orientation Once set these commands maintain their value until reset even after shutdown and re homing For example if the Control parameter is set to switch the unit to Ceiling orientation then the unit will remain in Ceiling orientation until another command is sent to switch back to Floor This allows the Control parameter to revert to another value without losing Projector Rear Projection the orientation or mirroring status Projector Front Projection Input from External RGBHV to Video input can be utilized with either RGBHV or VGA but not both You Projector can select between RGBHV and VGA in the menu system see DMX Control Screen on page 30 RGBHV is the factory default Input from S Video In camera Before using DMX to change DL 3 or DL 2 inputs you must enable the to Camera Out to Graphics Projector Input by DMX option in the menu system see Engine Set_ Projector Screen on page 34 or through the CMA see DL 3 and DL 2 Media Server Configuration Options on page 280 Once Input from Camera to the selection is made allow about 10 seconds for the change to take Graphics Engine default effect Graphics Engine to Projector Mechanically offsets the projector lens 107 vertically available for D
138. cular Amplitude ear 25 Texture Texture Ripple Circular Asymmetrical Circular Asymmetrical Amplitude Phase Eu M Fine selects key color using Green Blue Modifier channels 27 Transparent Color Medium selects key color Green Blue using Modifier channels 08 Transparent Color Coarse selects key color een Blue using Modifier channels 29 Transparent Color Invert Fine selects key color Green Blue using Modifier channels 30 Transparent Color Invert Medium selects key Green Blue color using Modifier channels 31 Transparent Color Invert Coarse selects key Cen Blue color using Modifier channels l l l Fades to Scan Line converts image colors to colors in a Selects iS single line of the image scan line a Noruggu g g image Transparent Wipes opens the selected graphic to reveal another graphic positioned Area of wipe behind it 34 Pixel Twist swirls a portion of the texture DES cemer TN pamer Direction and on X axis on Y axis amount of twist Picture in picture duplicates the texture and SUDpICIUIe SUED Subpicture 35 center Selects center Selects from 6 of wipe wipe options overlays it on the original center size y 9 on Xaxis on Yaxis DLHD Digital Light User Manual 81 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions DMX Adjustments ect Mode Name Description Modifier 1 Modifier2 Modifier 36 Magnifying Lens creates a virtual convex lens Lens center Lens center necia that magnifies a portion of the tex
139. d Graphic fixture types The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well Other Effect Mode Modifier channels are labeled Mod 1 Mod 2 and Mod 3 odie 2 I ine Effect Mode Name Description Modifier2 DI MOM TI cyan weoma T ERI NENNEN NN O mue ENCLL Red owen mue ENIM NN NC NN 9 Rosswposae EE Soliz met coli valo DM vale Red Green Be Eg Solarize 2 inverts a color if value gt DMX value 2 inverts a color if value gt DMX value Solarize 2 inverts a color if value gt DMX value Red Green Bue c E 3 sets color to O if value is DMX Green Blue value Solarize 4 sets color to O if value is DMX Hn Green Blue Color isis NN cycles colors with DMX value Green Blue controlling cycle speed 15 All or Nothing sets color values gt mod value Crash Blue 255 and all other color values 0 80 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions DMX Adjustments ect Mode Name Description modifiert Modifier2 Modifier From Red From Green to From Blue RGB Invert and Swap to GBR Red to Green Green to Blue Blue to Red ES RGB Invert and RGB Invert and Swapto BRG to BRG Red to Blue Green to Red Blue to Blue to Green Horizontal Vertical Edge Detect Color search size search size threshold Horizontal Vertical Comparison Ey Texture Ripple Horizontal Amplitude x Texture Texture Ripple Vertical Vertical Amplitude Frequency Phase Ripple Cir
140. d Projector Rear Projection commands map to the Projector s menu control buttons 6 Use the projector s on screen display as discussed in the projector s user manual that Shipped with your DL 3 fixture 48 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 7 Graphics Engine Overview DLHD DL 3 and AxonHD Media servers use virtually the same graphic engine software to control content selection and playback as well as 3 D Object and Global manipulation Protocol Options The Axon HD Axon HD Pro media servers as well as the DLHD Digital light use the latest HD Protocol for control This protocol version allows for control of up to 10 graphic layers per output on the Axon HD and HD Pro Servers and up to 9 graphic layers on the DLHD Limited backwards compatibility is provided for the V2 protocol on the Axon HD HD Pro server and DLHD fixture You can adjust the footprint by patching only the number of graphic layers you need for a minimum of 1 Global Layer and 1 Graphic Layer for the Axon Servers The minimum footprint for the DLHD is 1 Motion Layer 1 Global Layer and 1 Graphic Layer You select the protocol level in the fixture s onboard menu system for DLHD and DL 3 fixtures from the onboard menu systems or through the CMA for both fixtures and Axon media servers see Viewing Server Configuration on page 276 Image Optimizing Controls Using Live Effects in additional to the Black Level and Contrast Controls you can adjust the image for
141. ded by 92 31 EEC and 93 68 EEC Equipment referred to in this declaration of conformity was first manufactured in compliance with the following standards in 2005 Safety EN 60598 1 1997 EN 60598 2 17 1990 A1 A3 1998 A13 1999 EMC EN 55022 Conducted Emissions Class A Radiated Emissions Class A ANSI C63 4 Class A FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class A VCCI V 1 2001 04 Class A EN 55024 EN 61000 4 2 4 8kV EN 61000 4 3 A1 3V m EN 61000 4 4 IKV 0 5kV EN 61000 4 5 2kV 1kV EN 61000 4 6 3 Vrms EN 61000 4 11 gt 95 0 5p 30 25p gt 95 250p EN 61000 3 2 Class A EN 61000 3 3 USA Thursday August 21 2014 Kenneth Stuart Hansen Compliance Engineer DLHD Digital Light User Manual lii Product Modification Warning High End Systems products are designed and manufactured to meet the requirements of United States and International safety regulations Modifications to the product could affect safety and render the product non compliant to relevant safety standards Mise En Garde Contre La Modification Du Produit Les produits High End Systems sont concus et fabriqu s conform ment aux exigences des r glements internationaux de s curit Toute modification du produit peut entrainer sa non conformit aux normes de s curit en vigueur Produktmodifikationswarnung Design und Herstellung von High End Systems entsprechen den Anforderungen der U S Amerikanischen und internationalen Sicherheitsvorschriften Abanderungen dieses Produ
142. der OR 4 Select Copy from the Edit drop down menu or the right click popup list 5 Select Paste from the Media Files or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list As files are uploaded to fixtures the User interface displays progress information and notifies the user of any naming conflicts in renamed files or encoding problems Content Scanning Incorrectly encoded content can cause issues with playback performance network synchronization and graphics engine stability To prevent this the CMA automatically scans content locally on your computer or the Axon media server before actually loading it If no warnings or errors are found the content is loaded on to the server If warnings or errors are found a dialog box describes specific content problems Warnings are problems that will potentially cause issues with playback of the media on the fixture but won t affect graphics engine stability An example would be a movie not being encoded with all I frames or not having an End of Sequence header The CMA will allow these files to be loaded on to the server but it will alert you to potential issues by displaying the warnings in a dialog Errors are more serious problems with content that can create severe stability issues in media server software for example content encoded as the wrong type of stream Transport Stream instead of an Elementary Stream Errors are caused when content does not adhere to the MPEG2 encoding stand
143. der Name Content Description Value 4 Video loops of natural settings clouds water fire 6 Sea Brie Digtal vdeo loops prooton a Feedback Video Digtal vdeo loops pomooni o HESTedme Vio op tetas 00 Set of themed video loops 21 WEN HES Lithopatterns 1 High End Systems Lithopattern images 22 HES Lithopatterns 2 More images from High End Systems Lithopattern library HES Logos High End Systems Axon and DL 2 logos MEM HES Hi Res Variety of high resolution video backgrounds 25 20 22 23 24 85 NASA Images Space images from the Hubble telescope Video Input Live video input from internal camera or external device Daddy Van Productions Digital backgrounds Wet Digital Underwater footage 64 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media File The Media File parameter lets you identify which Stock or User media file to apply map as a texture on the selected 3 D object You can supplement the large library of Stock video loops and still images with Custom files This parameter selects media files from within the folder defined by the Media Folder parameter For a reference of media files available as stock content with your media server go to the link for the Stock Content Guide for DL 3 DL 2 and Axon products on http www highend com support digital lighting Default DMX Value 0 No file selected Tip You can preview a visual display
144. device s channel footprint on a DMX link There are 512 available channels on each DMX universe divided among all the devices in a particular universe A device must have a unique DMX channel range in order to respond independently to controller commands The DMX Start Channel is the first channel in that fixtures channel range DLHD Digital Light User Manual 39 CHAPTER 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start To determine each device s DMX Start Channel identify the footprint of every device on the universe The device s footprint is the number of consecutive DMX channels it requires and is determined by the channels in the fixture s protocol The fixture s DMX channel footprint must not overlap any other device s channel footprint on the link When two devices on the same DMX universe have overlapping channel footprints one or both devices will be disabled or behave erratically Once you have determined the footprint of your device a simple formula for finding the last valid Start Channel on a standard DMX512 link is 512 the unit s channel footprint 1 Digital Lighting Products The channel range for your Digital lighting product will depend on the model the Protocol mode and the number of Graphic objects you select DL 3 and Axon media servers running Version 2 0 fixture software all provide individual and composite graphical control for up to nine Graphic Objects DL 2 fixtures can control up to four Graphic objects You can in
145. ding The following rules apply to implementing the Digital MSpeed effect This effect can be applied at the Global level or the Graphic Object level but can only be applied once at any given level That is to say if applied twice at the global level only the first applied lowest numbered will have any effect e When Digital MSpeed is applied at the global level the mspeed values are applied to all the Graphic Objects Digital MSpeed applied at the Graphic Object level takes precedence over digital mspeed applied at the Global level This means you can apply a global value to all the Graphic Objects and then override that value by assigning a different set of values on a particular Graphic Object Crossfades under digital mspeed control are linear across the fade time All ramp snap combinations are set in the control system Modifier 1 applies MSpeed to rotation values When DMX 0 no MSpeed is applied and traditional crossfading can be used Crossfade times increase from O slowest to 255 fastest Modifier 2 applies MSpeed to scaling values When DMX 0 no MSpeed is applied and traditional crossfading can be used Crossfade times increase from O slowest to 255 fastest Modifier 3 applies MSpeed to position values When DMX 0 no MSpeed is applied and traditional crossfading can be used Crossfade times increase from O slowest to 255 fastest DLHD Digital Light User Manual 159 CHAPTER 13 Effect
146. e with the base perpendicular to the stage floor fixture mounted sideways Side mounting will result in significantly decreased lamp life 10 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Linking DLHD Fixtures DLHD fixtures should be linked to a standard DMX512 link for control by a DMX desk as well as a Ethernet fixture link for CMA functions The number of fixtures you can connect to a DMX link are determined by the combined number of channels required by all the fixtures The DMX channel footprint of a DLHD fixture is determined by the Protocol and the number of Graphic Objects you select for control Use data grade cable and 5 pin XLR cable connectors For cable and connector specification see Cables and Connectors on page 359 Test each cable with a voltage ohm meter VOM to verify correct polarity and to make sure that the negative and positive pins are not grounded or Shorted to the shield or to each other CAUTION Do not connect anything to the ground lug on the XLR connectors ANS Do not connect or allow contact between the common cable shield and the fixture s chassis ground Grounding the common could cause a ground loop and or erratic behavior To link one or more fixtures to a DMX controller 1 Connect the male XLR connector of a DMX Data cable to the controller s DMX Data Out connector 2 Connect the Data cable s female XLR connector to the Data In connector of the first
147. e image into a grid of Color ipit LED size opacing circles to mimic an LED wall peaking Faux Tile divides the image into square tiles Tile Size opacing coor peaking 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 57 CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Name Description Lo AA Modifier Modifier2 Modifiers Chroma Shift shifts the red blue and green Horizontal Vertical Not Used component colors shift shift 61 ShakeNBake introduces a random vibration Horizontal Vertical Scale effect Shake Shake 6 Slats Vertical renders the image in offset Number Vertical Fade from vertical slats of Slats Displacement Normal to Slats 2 63 Slats Horizontal renders the image in offset Number Horizontal Fade from horizontal slats of Slats Displacement Normal to Slats Downward Vertical Streaks pulls the image Vertical Start Streak Fade from down Position Angle Normal to Streak Sample Number of Scales the Gaussian Blur blurs the image Filter Passes Effect Sample Number of Scales the Horizontal Vertical UV to Gray turns everything in the image gray except for a selected UV chroma coordinate Engage ooo Brenes UV to Transparent turns everything in the image transparent except for a selected UV U Coordinate V Coordinate Tolerance chroma coordinate UV Select to Transparent turns a selected UV chroma coordinate transparent with the rest of U Coordinate V Coordinate Tolerance the image unchanged HS to Gray retai
148. e of the lens and move it over different areas of the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 10096 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the lens centerpoint from O top edge to 255 10096 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the lens from 0 smallest to 255 100 largest Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 107 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 143 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 61 176 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Magnifying Lens e Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 37 This effect applies spherical overlay that magnifies a portion of the texture to create a doubled virtual convex lens over a portion of the image You can adjust the size of the lens and move it over different areas of the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the lens centerpoint from O left edge to 255 10096 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the lens centerpoint from O top edge to 255 10096 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the size of the lens from O smallest to 255 100 largest Tip Zooming in with this lens effect creates an additional effect Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 107 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 143 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 61 DLHD Digital Li
149. e on a truss or another type of support Verify the truss or support will handle the combined weight of all the devices on the truss e Always mount the DLHD fixture with the mounting bracket assembly that shipped with your fixture and a safety cable attached using the mounting bracket to the fixture s base WARNING Before mounting disconnect power to the fixture If it has been operating allow the fixture to cool for five minutes before handling Do not use C Clamps to mount the DLHD fixture to truss N Use the following steps to mount a DLHD fixture on a standard truss 1 Due to its size and 7 Bracket screw holes weight at least two people should support Do s so 99 the fixture Always 6 stand on a firm stable surface when mounting e o a fixture to its support 2 Mount the clamps that shipped with fixture to e s the mounting brackets Qo o e 00 and then attach the two mounting brackets to the base of the fixture using the provided s uarter turn screws 4 Safety INPS cable loop Do iz DLHD Digital Light User Manual 9 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Tighten the clamps firmly to the fixture s base and to the support Run the safety cable through the loop on the fixture s base and around the truss NOTE High End Systems does not recommend operating the DLHD fixtur
150. e projector disconnect the Douse the projector lamp and allow the projector to go through its cool down procedure Disconnect the fixture from power Disengage the two latches on the bezel and remove the back cover Loosen the two captive screws that hold the top bezel and remove it from the unit plugs from the head logic board the head logic card facing toward the fixture s ee yoke e following eProjector Power Projector Control Serial Cable CONTROL PORT Mil y y Using a 5mm allen wrench reach under the unit and remove the four screws mounting the projector to the projector plate The screws are located above the plate where the head logic card is mounted Remove projector by pulling from the rear of the fixture s head taking care that the Zoom and Focus Wires do not get caught 268 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing the Lens Lens installation and replacement should be made CAUTION To avoid damaging the lens do not touch glass by qualified service personnel Use the following steps to access and replace the DLHD lens with any of the lens options available for the fixture Accessing the lens 1 Follow the steps for removing the projector from the unit in the section preceding this one 2 While pressing the release button on the top projector cover slide the top cover toward front to remove it Replacing
151. ecreases the grid divisions to a minimum of 10 x 10 at a value of 255 100 NOTE A small number of larger LEDs will also result in reduced color variation Adjusts the grid spacing and color around each LED A DMX value of 0 the minimum black line between cells The spacing increases to a maximum at a DMX value of 127 4996 At a value of 128 50 the space between cells reverts to the minimum spacing and turns white Increas ing the value further increases the white spacing to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 10096 Modifier 3 Adjusts the color peaking to simulate lighting at the LED center A DMX value of 0 no adjustment and flat color across the cell As you increase the DMX value the peaking increases to a maximum at 255 100 LA EL ALL T AJIILLL a DE gt L E gt gt aoa mT LE i ik k e bagpipe 8008 TIIIII ITIIIII TIITII LLLI TI TILLIT TERETE TETEE LEETE AMIIIILI Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 202 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 16 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 167 164 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Faux Tile M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 56 This effect divides the image into a grid of tiles with simulated lighting at the edges The color of the center pixel in each cell defines the solid color for that tile You can control the number and spacing of tile choose
152. ect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 20 This effect displays only the edges of image components with their color values Modifier 1 Adjusts horizontal edge search size from 0 2 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts vertical edge search size from 02 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Adjusts comparison edge threshold from 0 2 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 184 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 114 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 62 120 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge Detect Color e Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 104 This effect displays only the edges of image components with their color values with a scaler applied Modifier 1 Adjusts the sample distance from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts the edge threshold comparison from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Modifier 3 Sets the edge from 0 2 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 120 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 130 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 121 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge
153. ect Mode parameter DMX value 86 Maps a selected color coordinate to a YUV color space and turns it transparent Everything else is unchanged Modifier 1 Adjusts the U color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts the V color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Adjusts the color tolerance from 0 minimum to 255 10096 2 maximum Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 229 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 101 UV to Transparent Effect Mode parameter DMX value 85 Maps a selected color coordinate to a YUV color space and turns everything else transparent Modifier 1 Adjusts the U color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 2 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts the V color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Adjusts the color tolerance from O minimum to 255 100 maximum Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 229 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 101 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 153 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Yxy Luminance Scaling Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 101 Mapping the mage to a Luminance Chrominance color space allows brightness adjustment without changing image color Modifier 1 Scales luminance Values below the midpoint decrease luminance from 127 to O black Settings above the midpoint increase luminan
154. ect ratio DLHD Digital Light User Manual 97 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator NOTE Youcan find other configurations and information on sizing and compressing media to use with the Collage Generator at the High End Systems website www highend com support digital lighting Collage Parameters Collage Type The Collage Type global parameter has eighteen collage options including 14 Collage modes Standard Collage divides content for projection onto a flat surface Standard Collage with 360 wrap divides the content into an array and edge blending for projection onto a 360 surface array for projection onto a flat surface arranged into an array for projection onto a 360 surface 4 Standard collage plus blend right left bottom and top outside edges N In Standard Collage and Standard Collage with 360 Wrap options the content is automatically divided into cell segments by the graphics engine after you define the array size This yields good results in situations where moderate output resolution is suitable In Multipane Collage options where you pre configure the content into cells and project each cell from a separate server you can project a 1024x768 from each server In situations where you require extremely high resolution output of custom content the Multipane Collage options resolution capabilities is greatly increased because the graphics 98 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER
155. ect the filters bezel 5 Lift the prefilter away from the Filter bracket Pull base housing filter away from fixture to clean 6 Remove the two phillips pan screws securing the filter bracket and lift the filter unit off the fixture DLHD Digital Light User Manual 265 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 7 Remove the bracket and remove the HEPA filter from filter housing Inspect both the prefilter and the HEPA filter 8 A dirty prefilter can cause an early Service Filter warning If the prefilter looks dirty clean it with water Thoroughly dry the prefilter before proceeding 9 If the HEPA filter is discolored with particulates replace it with the part listed in Related Products and Accessories on page 4 Reassemble the Fixture 10 Reinstall the HEPA Filter with the rubber gasket down EE 11 Reattach the filter bracket with the two philips pan screws 12 Replace the prefilter over the bracket on velcro Place HEPA tabs filter with gasket against plenum 13 Replace the top cover fastening it with the two captive phillips head screws 14 Carefully replace the rear bezel making sure to position but do not force the gasket against the lamp cover located on the back of the projector and relatch the rear bezel assembly 266 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing the Lamp WARNING AN Allow the projector to cool for at least 45 minutes
156. ed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to O fastest speed Texture Ripple Vertical Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 23 This effect varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the Y axis without affecting the underlying object Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest soeed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to O fastest speed DLHD Digital Light User Manual 199 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Shift M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 88 This effect creates offset image elements by shifting the texture based upon selected color values Modifier 1 Shifts the texture left to right Modifier 2 Shifts the texture up to down Modifier 3 Selects a color and scales the shift Red and green colo
157. eligious 23 4 12 13 2013 4 58 29 PM H O Stock Media CQHES Gothic 24 11 12 13 2013 4 58 03 PM E Stock Objects CQHES Digital Aerials 2 25 71 12 13 2013 4 57 53 PM All Configuration COHES Theme S lls 26 60 12 13 2013 4 58 35 PM CQApollo Glass 27 29 12 13 2013 4 51 44 PM CiArtbeats 28 12 12 13 2013 4 52 07 PM 9 DHA_TopMac 29 31 12 13 2013 4 52 58 PM 9 Beacon_Digi_Gobos 30 7 12 13 2013 452 29 PM 5 Amorphous_Digi_Gobos 31 Z 12 13 2013 45142 PM 5 Inlight 32 11 12 13 2013 4 58 46 PM CQHES Lithopatiems 1 33 151 12 13 2013 4 58 16 PM SHES Lithopattems 2 34 110 12 13 2013 4 58 18 PM BHES Logos 35 10 12 13 2013 4 58 19 PM LQHES Hi Res 36 7 12 13 2013 4 58 11 PM 2 Nasa_ Images 37 36 12 13 2013 4 58 51 PM C3Blue Pony Digital 38 32 12 13 2013 4 52 43 PM 13 Folders Disk Free Space 55 71 GB A Status Bar at the bottom of the page indicates the number of files or folders in a selected folder in the left pane as well as free space on the local computer hard drive and its IP address 212 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Server Identification Information Selecting the All Server view displays all the Digital Light fixtures and Axon servers on the fixture network In the following example six servers have been identified on the network The right pane contains the following details in a table format e Server I D number defaults to 1 but can be configured in the CMA
158. ensity of a composite image over the separate Graphic Object s Opacity parameter settings Increase intensity from not visible at a DMX value of O to full intensity at a value of 255 100 Default DMX Value 0 no intensity video black Tip The Dimmer Object Opacity and Global Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Intensity parameters all need DMX values greater Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 255 100 than O for a defined image to be visible Graphic Object 1 Intensity DMX 255 100 Global Intensity DMX 128 50 Graphic Object 2 Intensity DMX 179 70 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 79 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Global Effect Mode Channels There are five banks of Global Effect Mode parameters each with associated Modifier channels All Global Effect Mode parameters have an identical list of color and visual effect options This lets you apply a multiple effect combination to the composite image The table below describes the interaction between a Global Effect Mode parameter and the three associated Modifier parameters for each option You can find a detailed description of each option in Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions NOTE Modifier channels for Effect Mode 1 are labeled as CMY in the Wholehog system so you can also make use of the color picker HSI and other Wholehog functions Use the CMY parameter controls to adjust the three Effect Mode 1 Modifier parameters for both the Global an
159. ent to 0 fastest speed Texture Ripple Circular Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 24 This effect varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the Z axis without affecting the underlying object This creates an effect of concentric rippling out from the object center Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from O 2 no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from O no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 5096 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 10096 fastest speed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustment to O fastest speed 198 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Ripple Horizontal Y Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 22 This effect varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the X axis without affecting the underlying object Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase spe
160. er Start Inside Surface 00 0 0 0 0 Pi 0 l NEN 180 i Vertical Cylinder Default Geometry Vertical Cylinder Centre x y Z Longitude Deg 1 Start 1 0 75 00End 105 00 Note Once you click New the Curved Geometry options cannot be changed unless you click Reset and start a new Cylinder mesh 248 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Cone Geometry When you select the Cone shape you can set the following SO Select Inside Surface if you want to display the or Curved Geometries eee sphere as a concave surface cenre pd Mi EF iid m uud Longitude Deg Start 0 End 180 2 You can choose the x y and z coordinates as the cone grid s centerpoint Define the Latitude and Longitude to choose a portion of the cone Cone Default Geometry Cone Centre x y z 0 0 0 Longitude Deg Start 75 00End 105 00 Note Once you click New the Curved Geometry options cannot be changed unless you click Reset and start a new Cone mesh DLHD Digital Light User Manual 249 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Once you have selected the Geometry and click on New the mesh being edited will be included in the display with control points indicated as black dots This current file will be automatically assigned a name in the File Name field that will be maintained throughout the editing sessional and can be renamed by the user outside of the editing mode 19
161. er 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 E P um ee x Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 30 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 30 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 128 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 147 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Solarize M Object Effect M Global Effect Each of the Solarize effects remaps colors to a narrow value range and inverts the color below a set threshold using different algorithms Solarize effects can create strong highlights Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Red color values below the threshold are converted to cyan Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Blue color values below the threshold are converted to magenta Modifier 3 Increases green color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Green color values below the threshold are converted to yellow Solarize Effect Mode parameter DMX value 9 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 170 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 137 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 232 148 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Solarize e Effect Mode parameter DMX value 10 ti Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 212 Mod
162. er normally You can select Media Trigger Opacity to change to the Play Modes that trigger when Opacity is greater than zero To restore to normal triggering select Media Trigger Normal CMY The Global and Graphic fixture types both contain CMY controls for the Effect Mode modifier channels The default for Effect Mode 1 is set to CMY1 as well For some effect options the CMY parameters will not adjust color but will adjust the effect per the DL 3 or DL 2 DMX protocol You can find a description of CMY controls functionality for each effect option in Chapter 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions on page 107 Control Channel Functions Many of the control channel functions in the motion fixture only operate if the dimmer changes from gt 0 to O at the same time or just after a change is made to the control channel For more detailed description see Control Channel Functions on page 42 42 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Quick Start with a Wholehog Console Hog4 consoles allow easy control of the many attributes associated with Axon and Digital Light media servers The Wholehog library groups these attributes as multiple fixture types for each unit Motion fixture type available on Digital Light fixtures only controls movement and camera attributes Global fixture type controls attributes of the composit image Graphic fixture type controls attributes of an i
163. ere is a persistent error A persistent error is a case where the error condition continues to occur The second way to view Status messages is by navigating to the Info_Status screen This screen displays current error or status messages If there are multiple error warning messages displayed use the up down arrows to scroll through the list in the top pane When an item is highlighted in the top pane the bottom pane details information associated with that error Supported Error Warning Messages PROJ STATUS COOLING This message will end when The projector must cool the fixture has reached the down before it can re strike recommended operational the lamp temperature Projector Temperature Status Info_Status tab only Motion Shut Down This message does not appear in large format The Motion Systems is in shut down mode To return to normal operation power cycle or perform a HOME ALL Motion Shut Down Status Filter Missing Error FILTER MISSING ERROR Fe not Present Insert Service Filter Error FILTER SERVICE ERROR iter needs Servicing Replace Filter NOW Filter needs Servicing Replace Filter SOON Filter Service Warning FILTER SERVICE WARN Projector Lamp Life Emol LAMP LIFE ERROR rated life and must be replaced now Projector Lamp Life Warni LAMP LIFE WARN arning of it s rated life Replace soon The Lamp has exceeded its Home the fixture through the menu system Test_Home_ Moti
164. ernet cables using the Art Net protocol The Art Net screen contains for setting the number of DMX Universes and Ethernet Sub networks containing this fixture from 0 16 Select a DMX Protocol type by choosing V1 or V2 from the drop down list in the Version field and the number of Graphic Objects you want to use in your application in the Layers field e V2 Version 2 protocol retains the original DL 3 DMX protocol footprint and is compatible with legacy shows e HD High Definition protocol and can control up to ten graphic objects Edit the DMX Start Channel field by entering a valid Start Channel for the protocol and number of graphic objects you have selected Scroll through the numbers 1 512 in the Start Channel field to set a valid start channel for the protocol you have chosen A valid start channel will allow the number of consecutive channels on the link needed for the protocol and number of Graphic objects you have selected See Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 39 You can assign each fixture a unique Fixture I D number from 1 255 This allows the fixture to be identified on the ethernet fixture link for tasks like synchronizing playback between Digital Light fixtures and uploading custom content with the Content Management Application CMA You can manually set this number in the menu or through the CMA see Fixture Identification on page 211 Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link is described in Chapter 2 Setup and Conf
165. ers Network Synchronization is done using a reference master server that sends certain information about its current playback and output to the other fixtures on the network through Ethernet packets The other servers or slave servers use this information to set their playback and effects timing the same as the master server Network Synchronization is not slaving With slaving the master fixture s DMX values for synchronized functions would override the DMX values in the slave servers When you use Network Synchronization the appropriate DMX channels for all the slave fixtures and the master fixture must be set to the same values Netuiork Synchronization Requirements In order for Network Synchronization to function properly there are a few requirements that must be adhered to in the set up of the fixtures All of the servers must be linked on an Ethernet network This network can be set up with Auto IP addresses or DHCP addresses The Fixture ID for each media server in the network must be unique The Fixture ID is used to assign the master and slave servers and having multiple media servers with the same ID will cause the Synchronization information being sent over the network to be processed incorrectly A fixture ID default of 1 is assigned to every DL 3 DL 2 and Axon server on your Ethernet fixture network For synchronization to work you will need to assign each DL 3 DL 2 and Axon server a Unique Fixture ID from 1 to 255 us
166. ers The Stock Content and User Content reside in separate folders The High End Systems website highend com and the High End Systems Digital Lighting Community forums highend Custom User Content on page 283 and Custom User Warps for basic considerations in developing m are resources for tips and techniques on creating User Content See your own content for Axon HD media servers Stock Media Files Inside User I mage and Stock I mage folders are Library folders containing collections of media files Media files can be still images or video clips in one of the following formats de d mg emp mw mi mg mM NOTE AxonHD media servers support jpg formatted using RGB color CMYK color files are not currently supported High End Systems Content Management Application Ble Media Files Hel HIGH END SYSTEMS i Al Servers 3 servers Name pes Dix Size Width Hi B q DL30ne 1 El Bal ChureHD mpg mpg 1 32 925 KB 1024 768 417 20 01330 mA User Mecha El Beach waves HD mpg mpg 2 68 359 KB 1024 768 B40 30 0 28 0 CANA E Blob Holes HD meg mpg 3 5EMGKB 10 768 768 30 0 25 60 Ta pr E Breading Bullete HD mpg mpg 4 76 125 KB 1024 768 Ser 30 032 0 a i nU ias Bubble Texture HD mpg mog 5 29297kB 1024 768 360 3 012 0 G Hs OB El Bubles Rapid mpg mpg 5 29 255 KB 762 576 430 30 0 16 D O HES Atmospheric 4 El Bubbles mpg mpg 7 23437 KB 640 480 480 30 016 0 C3 On The Wall Stud E Bubblescape HD m
167. erview on programming DLHD DL 3 Axon HD and Axon media servers and an example of using a Wholehog console to patch and display output from a media server DMX Programming Overview eee sensn nah hnn nne a naa n nmn uua uana uu nnn 39 DIMAS LZ ENKS ia eaaet doin aat a nci di Mm It 39 S DIE VS TD6 bIE DMX PalalTiet els nc dc steer cu ots des ta patr repeti ua oso gab en Us 39 Determining a DMX Start Channel sssssssseesssssene nene nnn 39 ec a diia 39 Digitalbrghting Products dos 40 Lighting Console TIDS 20 A KNEE RI ARM RM NR RR RN NS 41 viclig Mitio c Iq qc PEE A EA A 41 Patching Digital Light Fixtures and Axon Media Servers sees 41 DMX Output Display Formats usse soi d rbd toe ca nr esten artis 41 Wholehog Programming Notes 2 seeeeeeeannne nena hh nnne a nna ann 42 Play SPESO duisi e e ae recu tta t Lea san x etes e E ELMAR Ad ee ioc E 42 Mask SODE t E 42 Play Modes CODICIA necu Dad bs Men MA e dC db MERE 42 OI ese scratches EP crop MICE RR 42 Control Channel EUPCUOLDS oeste dispen ot cite eli na e uc do berba edic dta ONE 42 Quick Start with a Wholehog Console onere enne nnne nn nnne 43 DLHD Digital Light User Manual xi Chapter 6 Fixture Motion Functions This chapter describes mechanical movement control for DLHD fixtures Pah and TIME a 45 Dimmert isa su eusssv suwss sveswuwsw v suu gau E EEAWEEEEEEESR
168. escriptions Spherical Mapping Object Effect MGlobal Effect Spherical Mapping adjusts a rectangular output to project on a portion of a sphere It is especially useful for projecting a Collage onto a sphere or a portion of a sphere Spherical mapping utilizes a total of nine Effect Modifier parameters to adjust positioning In addition to the three modifiers associated with the Global Effect two Graphics Object Effects provide six additional Modifier parameters Use these adjustments in conjunction with Keystone parameters and Ratio parameters to refine the output shape on the spherical surface For a more information and a detailed setup guide for Spherical Mapping see Mapping a Collage to a Spherical Surface on page 140 Spherical Mapping Outside Effect Mode parameter DMX value 142 This effect corrects shape distortions and controls blending for Collages projected onto the outside surface of a sphere Spherical Mapping Inside Effect Mode parameter DMX value 143 This Global Effect corrects shape distortions and controls blending for Collages projected onto the inside surface of a sphere Modifier Parameter Adjustments When Spherical Mapping is selected the associated Global Effect Modifier parameters adjust as follows Modifier 1 Adjusts the longitude horizontal angle A value of O no adjustment The number of degrees of angle increases as you increase value to maximum at 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts the latitude
169. esednsiccerscsarecedaisssaaaddnstaneuseanascusesucasaanesteiaaens 69 Rotation Parameters 1 EMI MA MM EMEN MNRRMFMKa URRUEE SERRE RE E MEER EE EREE MEME 71 ARO Erea esu o Ld ALT LIII 71 Y IROLaciOn MCN TETTE p 72 ZION aoee tia TENER 72 Scaling The ODJGCE sicessresucwoecnsuseccnredsesueeacceadheatavscsssauiecvaseaneneuesessecreecsasanneseess 74 KS CAC rt a den lod Ass 74 A O O NR O RN AS ET RN 74 SCA da a dota dto ofa 75 Changing Object Position cciciociioicocacair narnia 76 AS O eae eaten cat ed 76 Y rro Ee NR TERT 77 Z POSICION dad uci aa 78 DLHD Digital Light User Manual xiii Chapter 11 Global Functions Global Graphic controls affect the composite image created by defining multiple separate object graphics You can adjust intensity define masks select a point in space to view the composite image and control keystone correction Global Intensity isses aaa RE MANN QUEEN PM PM FM bane uauseeneuausueedsentnGuaneunc 79 Global Effect Mode Channels o oseeeee ee eene eene n nnnm nnn 80 Global COHtFOL sssrin e a acens 87 Shutdown and Reset Options 0cccccccccccoconnnnncnnnnnca cnn nnns rr 87 On Screen SUAUSUICS uaa Penta oi REE 87 Spherical Control Statistles iaa 87 Performance SlALISUCS artrosis cal adios idas 87 Ni omo pl santa diles oo 87 Allethv One CONO ODIO baaa tada 88 Masking Control A eau aise a A RA DX DUE 90 Mask Shape Select and Strobing occocccccccccccnncccannncncnnnnc cnn nensem nnn
170. exture on it You can apply this effect to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it This parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without an associated texture Modifier 1 Defines the red color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed ina backward direction to 0 fastest change speed Modifier 2 Defines the green color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component speed in the same way as Modifier 1 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 125 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Gray maker Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 108 This effect gradually transitions the color image to a grayscale image Use the Gray Maker effect when you want to add an undertone of grey to the colors in an image NOTE If content is already grayscale there is no effect applied but Modifier 2 can still affect image contrast Modifier 1 At a DMX value of 0 the image will be full color As you increase the DMX value more gray is introduced until at a DMX value of 255 all color has been replaced with shades of gray Modifier 2 Adjusts the brightness of the image at the grayscale transition level selected with the Modifier 1 parameter Modifier 3 Not
171. f control points in 0 00 0 00 0 00 the x y and z direction Oa m m a em First set the degrees of rotation for each step from 01 to 359 Then you can press the corresponding button to increase or decrease the rotation for X Y or Z Rectangular Grid with control point selected Rectangular Grid with selection rotated 60 00 in the Y direction Scale You can scale a selection of control points in the x y and z direction DLHD Digital Light User Manual 251 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor First set the size of each step from 1 1 to 2 for each axis Then you can increase or decrease the Scale of the selection incrementally by clicking the Scale and Scale buttons Rectangular Grid with control point selected Rectangular Grid Scale in equal increments of x and y 2 The z axis remains at 1 Resolution You can set the warp density for the Rectangular and the Spline grids in the Resolution field Click on Vertical and Horizontal buttons to increase or decrease the number of grid sections in either direction or click on Full or Full to increase the resolution proportionally in both directions Note In all curved surface shapes resolution is specified as part of the Geometry selection see Geometry Editing Fields on page 245 252 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor r A ku Vau wg adn d qas XN VA VEN A 4444 YA E 9 EY KY YEA ANA nens AAA A A VV O VV
172. faults back to 0 e Any settings affected by the synchronize mode you select need to be mirrored on both objects to Sync correctly Setting a Graphic Object to sync to itself will have no effect There are three sync mode options available for each of the ten Graphic Object layers e Synchronize to Graphic movie time e Synchronize to Object rotation e Synchronize to Graphic movie time and Object rotation See for the DMX values associated with each of these Effect Synchronization Synchronizing Effects happens as soon as the Sync To parameter is set on Global Layer of a server No special Sync Mode setting is needed Synchronizing a Server to Itself Movie playback and effects can be synchronized between a Graphic Object on a single fixture for example making sure all Graphic Objects on a single fixture are playing back in sync with one another This is programmed the same way as Synchronization between servers except that the Sync To parameter is set to its own Fixture ID Synchronizing a Master Server to another Server Even if a server is functioning as a master server it is still possible to synchronize this server to another server This can be useful in cases where multiple collages are playing the same movie A single server in each collage can act as that collage s master and then those masters can be synchronized together to ensure all collages are in sync A master server should not be set to sync to one of its own slave
173. fect When Modifiers 1 and 2 both have a value less than 0 there is no Blur Increasing Modifier 1 and Modifier 2 values increases the sample distance and number of filter passes Modifier 3 Applies a range of curve shapes from a DMX value 0 through 255 100 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 171 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Gaussian Halo M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 99 This effect blurs the content from around a circular area in the center of the image toward the edges NOTE Adjusting Mod 3 then Mod 1 and finally Mod 2 will give the best results with the least CPU demand Modifiers 1 Increases the sample distance to determine the smoothness of the blurring from O minimum to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Increases the number of filter passes from O one pass to 255 100 a maximum of sixteen filter passes Modifier 3 Applies a range of curve shapes from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum adjustment Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 193 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 172 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Horizontal Mirror M Object Effec
174. fect Mode Parameter DMX value 113 This option provides a negative of the image and then lets you adjust the amount of color and the red and green color components Modifier 1 Adjusts the color level from full at a DMX value of O to the lowest level at a DMX value of 255 Modifier 2 Default of 128 no adjustment Moving toward a DMX value O subtracts Red Moving toward a DMX value 255 subtracts Green Modifier 3 Not Used DLHD Digital Light User Manual 133 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Posterizer M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 110 This effect uses the associated Modifier 1 parameter to posterize by replacing each color in an image with the highest values of that color but expanding it only to the border of that color There is no bleeding or blending of colors Modifier 1 Adjusts color polarization level The higher the value the more color detail will be removed Modifier 2 Adjust the image contrast from O no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum contrast Modifier 3 Not Used Modifier1 parameter DMX value 190 Modifier2 parameter DMX value 2255 134 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Push to Sepia Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 106 This option converts all color in the image to sepia tones Modifier 1 Fades from original color at a DMX value 0 to a range of
175. fferent angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 130 Default DMX Value 32768 50 No X Rotation of Value Function Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around X axis fast to slow 25 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around X axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around X axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around X axis slow to fast Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object through another a P o ZN Original Object 1 and Object 2 X axis Rotation Applied to Object 2 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 71 CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Y Rotation The Y Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object around the Y axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a horizontal flip at variable speeds This parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 130 Default DMX Value 32768 50 No Y Ro
176. fluence the footprint of the fixture on a DMX link with the protocol you select and the number of graphic objects you implement Footprint on a Standard DMX512 Link pieced Version 2 DLHD DL3 Axon 8 76 ss 3 0 60 11 56 01 46 91 436 xe ns 4 Select the protocol level in the fixture s onboard menu system for DLHD DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures or through the CMA for Axon HD Axon and any Digital Light server see Viewing Server Configuration on page 276 For a table of channels for Axon HD media server protocol download the Protocol document from the High End Systems website at http www highend com support digital lighting axon asp 40 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start Uighting Console Tips Lighting consoles differ in many aspects and it is important to understand how your console operates with Axon HD Axon DL 3 and DL 2 media servers Fixture Libraries Many sophisticated lighting consoles utilize pre made fixture libraries A fixture library consists of profiles for various types of lighting fixtures and devices Each profile corresponds to the fixture s DMX protocol and allows for ease of programming Depending upon the manufacturer of your lighting console some parameters might have different labels for parameter names and functions than are listed within this manual Consult your lighting console manual for further information NOTE Downloadi
177. for example during a software upload S 320 processor card in the base housing is receiving code Blinking Hard drive activity Steady Internal computer is receiving power Power Red Steady Fixture s Motion Control system is receiving power Board LED States LEDs located on DLHD fixture boards indicate how the unit is functioning The following Table lists LED States and problems they may indicate Steady Orange S3 iris sensor open Eure Red Green or OFF Yes Link communication error bad Slow Flashing Green Running system code normal operation i Running boot code expecting or updating DLHD Digital Light User Manual 277 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting E NEL A A Updating firmware Base or ae No DMX send or received Steady Orange No Normal Operation ps Steady Orange No N peration Red Green or OFF Link Communication error General Troubleshooting Suggestions The following table shows general troubleshooting suggestions Fem 0 SM Check the fuse page 268 Verify fixture is plugged in to an appropriately rated power source power ratings are shown on Won t power on Check power cord wiring During certain movements If you have loosened or tightened anything in the pan and tilt assemblies the fixture motion slows the stepper motors may be out of alignment Recalibrate pan and tilt motors missteps or loses position by selecting Calibrate Motors button in the Test Home menu
178. function Each channel consists of 256 values ranging from O to 255 The lighting console is programmed to transmit a corresponding DMX value for the desired function of each parameter All DMX values are stored within the lighting console and typically are referred to as cues scenes or presets A lighting console locates a device on the link by its DMX Start Channel 8 bit vs l6 bit DMX Parameters Most parameters of an automated light use one channel of DMX providing 256 values of control 0 255 This is known as 8 bit DMX Although most parameters use 8 bit DMX several require a more accurate range of values than can be provided with a single DMX channel By utilizing two DMX channels for a single parameter 65535 values become available for controlling and adjusting parameter functions This is known as 16 bit DMX You can adjust 16 bit DMX values in both coarse and fine increments The first channel of the pair provides coarse control changes of the DMX value in increments of 256 The second channel provides fine control and changes of the DMX value in increments of 1 Individual access of the two DMX channels used with 16 bit parameters varies by lighting console Most modern DMX consoles bind these two channels into a single 16 bit parameter to accurately perform 16 bit crossfades Consult your lighting console manual for further information Determining a DMX Start Channel Overview The DMX Start Channel is the first channel of a
179. ge Collage Keystone Correction Framing Shutters Warp Selection Audio Balance Global Intensity Graphics Engine outputs final image to projector 50 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 7 Graphics Engine Overview Graphics Engine Functions Object Graphic Functions For an individual object you can control The media file and 3 D object selection for the layer Media playback including What portion of the movie plays Playback speed Playback mode direction and style of playback The object transparency opacity Visual Effects including colormixing and geometric effects e Synchronization e mage Rotation Scale and Position Global Functions Global controls are applied to composite image created by multiple 3 D images For the combined image you can Adjust the composite image intensity level Apply visual effects including colormixing and geometric effects Select a mask shape size it and apply edge fades and color to the mask Apply and color mix an image edge fade Control keystone correction Control framing shutters Establish the point in 3 D space from which image will be viewed Making Graphics Effect Choices Because you have control of many parameters there are sometimes several ways to accomplish the same look Which solution you choose depends to a large extent on the transition to other effects you want to achieve DLHD Digital Light User Manual 5
180. ght User Manual 177 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Mattes Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 144 The Global Effect lets you select from a variety of provided patterns to superimpose over the composite image Modifier parameters select the pattern and effects for a matte The images below show two examples of the Mattes effect In the image on the left the Modifier 2 value selected the matte pattern Modifier 1 sets black as transparent The Modifier 3 value corresponds with a lookup to an internal gradient map to determine the matte color In the example on the right the same Matte is selected by Modifier 2 This time the Modifier 1 value selects white as transparent and uses a graphic object as a texture A Modifier 3 DMX value of O designates the Matte texture as Graphic Object 1 s media file content minus any applied effects Modifier parameter 1 DMX 11 Modifier parameter 1 DMX 5 Modifier parameter 2 DMX 13 Modifier parameter 2 DMX 13 Modifier parameter 3 DMX 203 Modifier parameter 3 DMX 0 Modifier 1 This parameter determines transparency and color effects for the selected matte DMX Modifier 1 Action 0 Black transparent use matte color Black transparent inverting matte color 2 White transparent use matte color 4 Black transparent using a Graphic Object media file content as the matte texture Black transparent with grayscale used as alpha Black transpa
181. h the content you want to backup in the right pane 3 Select Create Content Archive from the Media Files or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list Deploying a Content Archive Deploying the Content Archive you created restores the user content to a fixture To replicate this content to other fixtures on the link use the Clone Content feature see Cloning User Content on page 228 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 227 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Cloning User Content Cloning is a file transfer operation where all the User Content of a single fixture is replicated across one or more other fixtures Cloning preserves all user content naming and DMX values This allows you for example to send the custom content for a specific show to all the fixtures used in that show with one operation To clone user content 1 In the CMA Client Window select All Server in the left pane 2 Select the Server with the content you want to clone in the right pane 3 Select Clone Content from the Media Files or Objects drop down menu or the right click popup list A Clone Content Wizard lets you select one or more servers on the fixture network as the destination for cloned content Clone Content Wizard Es HIGH END SYSTEMS Select the destination media servers Name iPAddress Software Version Model O Axon One 169 254 150 81 20 0 2412 Axon O Axon Four 163 254 122 38 20 0 2412 Aon O Axon
182. he lt Menu gt button instead of lt Enter gt leaves the original setting and closes the list To return to the Menu tab column press the left direction on the Navigation button DLHD Digital Light User Manual 23 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Menu Options The menu display consists of a set of top level tabbed screens and their associated subtabs Main Sub Tabs Fields i DMX512 Sets DMX as fixture communication source Sets Art Net as fixture communication source Source Arce You need to identify the Universe and Subnet by selecting a number from 0 16 in their corresponding field CS V 2 protocol is compatible with legacy DL 3 V2 Control Protocol shows High Definition Protocol Layer Bor 09 rr a the number of Graphic Objects from Assigns the fixture a unique number on fixture Fixture 1D is network for use with Synchronization feature Start Channel 1 512 Sets the fixture s DMX Start Channel DMX Displays current fixture Movement parameter values Protocol Global Displays current parameter values for the View composite image Displays current parameter values for the 1 9 graphic objects selected graphic object Main Table Displays current DMX values for all 512 DMX link channels in rows of values Offset Scrolls through rows of DMX values Raw View Refresh Rate aiiis the of DMX packets received Refresh ecc DMX values updated instantly Timer Of Display does not refresh Inverts the directio
183. he Phillips screws and washers making sure not to break the glass CAUTION Use plastic washers only when replacing the front glass Using metal washers can damage the glass 7 Replace the front bezel 272 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing Motor Driver Boards WARNINGS AN Disconnect power before servicing Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before y Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to a 6s handling The DLHD fixture is designed with two motor driver boards 1 The board that controls the motors for the tilt focus zoom and iris functions as well as fans is located in the fixture head 2 The board that drives pan motor and fans is located in the base housing All cabling is marked with labels corresponding to locations on board for easy replacement When changing a board align the screw holes and standoffs to ensure correct orientation in the fixture CAUTI ON The fixture will not function correctly if contact screws are missing from driver boards Fixture Head Driver Board To replace the fixture head driver board l Disconnect power to the fixture and allow it to cool 2 Unlatch the two rear latches and remove the rear bezel 3 Use a 3mm allen wrench to remove the addressing screws and star washers 4 Position new board against module aligning the center top standoff Pl
184. hed Video Pattern 1 displays graphic object with texture for the number of graphic layers you have defined 2 alternates between an alignment grid and a color calibration screen Media Folder Current Selected Media File Current Selected 236 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Info Tab Server Display Connectors Art Net amp I O Info Menu Display r Capture Settings Server Info Model AxonHD Server Name axonHDTG Software 1 0 0 0 IP Address 0 0 0 0 WES 1 0 0 Unique Number 40644438 Firmware 1 0 0 0 Disk Free Space 74045 Hardware CPU i7 4770 Fixture Defaults on Motherboard H87I PLUS Video Adapter 1 HD7700 Reboot Server Previous Server Next Server Server Info Allows fixture name of up to 26 characters IP Address Read only assigned to that unit by the router or Auto IP Unique Number Read only assigned by factory Disk Free Space Read only in MB Version Info Harduiare Read Only displays current hardware configuration Motherboard Video Adapter 1 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 237 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Miscellaneous Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Fixture Defaults On restores fixture defaults Off displays whenever defaults has been changed Reboot Server Check Reboot to restart the internal graphics engine 238 DLHD Digital Light User Manual C
185. hic Object Displays the ninth effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object 88 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions 5 d MA y S N y Graphic Object 1 Graphic Object 2 Graphic Object 3 Graphic Object 4 Graphic Object 5 Graphic Object 6 Graphic Object 7 Graphic Object 8 Graphic Object 9 Composite Image displaying the object with graphic Spherical Effect effects applied Or Collage Effect DLHD Digital Light User Manual 89 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Masking Control Mask Shape Select and Strobing The Mask Select parameter lets you choose a mask to frame or overlay a EIA value Mask Shapes composite image You can choose to apply a mask to an image when you 0 128 Round iris closing from outside in aro aano endo maken Rectangle closing from outside in image to black or a solid color without Rectangle closing from inside out fading intensity Checkerboard variation 1 Mask Shapes Checkerboard variation 2 The rape engine EIER 16 134 Radial wipe variation 1 provides 30 mask shapes including aa les CE circular rectangular and oval masks 7 185 Mete that close from inside out or outside o8 1896 Radial wipe variation 3 in Checker Board Radial Wipes and 9 1837 Radial wipe variation 4 Multi panel options are also included Triangles variation 1 with variations t Triangles variation 2 Default DMX Va
186. ht User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Particle System Object Effect MGlobal Effect Three Particle System effects operate together to create a particle pattern effect By using all three effects you can in effect apply nine modifier adjustments NOTE You must use the Particle System 1 effect Then you can add Particle System 2 and Particle System 3 for additional Modifier support to the initial effect Particle System Effect Mode parameter DMX value 95 This option provides the baseline effect Modifier 1 Determines emitter pattern that will shape the particle effect Multiple emitter patterns are available and more will be added in subsequent releases All DMX values after the last pattern variation default to the first emitter pattern Random Within Rectangle 0 Randomiininfeciangle ar RandomoptetRadal 0 a RandomTprighiRadial RandomAtTop 21 22 EE NE RandomOnCircleOutward 24 25 O4 RandomBottomLeftRadial RandomAtRight NE RandomTopLeftRightRadial E RandomAtBottom RandomBottomRightLeftRadia RandomAtLeft RandomFourCorners RandomAtTopAndRight RandomStaticInsideRectangle RandomAtRightAndBottom RandomStaticOutsideRectang le SequentialTopToBottom Modifier 2 Adjusts the trailing of each particle as it moves across the image from O shortest trail to 255 100 longest DLHD Digital Light User Manual 181 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 3
187. ht User Manual 293 APPENDIX C Safety Information Ap ndice C Informacion Importante De Seguridad Advertencia Para Protecci n Continua Contra Incendios Este equipo debe conectarse a un circuito que tenga una protecci n m xima contra una sobrecargas de 20 A Advertencia Para La Protecci n Continua Contra Electrocuciones Si se recibi este equipo sin el conector de alimentacion monte usted el conector correcto seg n ia clave siguente moreno vivo azul neutral verde amarillo tierra e Desconecte el suministro de energ a antes de cambiar l mparas o prestar servicio de reparaci n Este equipo esta disenado para usarce en lugares secos no lo exponga a la lluvia o humedad Derive el servicio de reparaci n de este equipo al personal calificado El interior no contiene repuestos que puedan ser reparados por el usuario Equipo de Clase Este equipo debe conectarse a tierra 294 DLHD Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX C Safety Information Appendice C Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza Avvertenza Per Prevenire Incendi Questa apparecchiatura e da collegarsi ad un circuito con una protezione da sovraccarico massima di 20 ampere AN Avvertenza Per Prevenire Le Scosse Elettriche e Da non montare sopra una superficie infiammabile e Mantenere l apparecchio a un minimo di 1 0 metri 3 28 piedi di distanza dai materiali combustibili e Sostituire i fusibili usando soltanto quelli
188. i igital lightin Default DMX Value 1 full screen flat surface TIP You can select the same object file for images that will be interacting with each other If both objects occupy exactly the same area in 3 D space Z fighting a shimmering effect on some portions of the composite image can occur as the graphics engine tries to determine which object should be in the foreground You can avoid this effect by making a slight adjustment to one of the object s scale or moving it forward or back using the Z Position parameter in respect to the other 62 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media Folder This parameter defines a folder directory containing a collection of media files The media files within the assigned folder can then be selected using the Media File parameter DMX values for folders are assigned as follows e DMX values 1 39 are used or reserved for Stock Content DMX values 40 240 are reserved for User Content e DMX value 255 is reserved for live video input Default DMX Value 1 HES Core Media files The following table describes the Stock Content folders available on DL 3 DL 2 and Axon Servers NOTE Media folders with DMX Values of 27 35 are only available as stock content on DL 3 fixtures and Axon Version 2 servers DLHD Digital Light User Manual 63 CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Media Folder Descriptions T Media Fol
189. icates CMA connection Ethernet port to connect DL 3 unit to fixture link computer running CMA SDI video OUT SDI video IN 5 pin DMX512 Data In and Data Out Two USB ports for peripherals including hard drives RECEIVE Q TRANSMIT O 100 120 V 50 60Hz 7A 200 240 V 50 60Hz 3 5 A 5 a DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Pan and Tilt Locking The DLHD fixture ships with pan and tilt latches locked You can unlock adjust these latches to Stabilize the fixture for mounting NOTE Disengage Pan and Tilt locks before operating the fixture Attaching a Power Cord Cap The DLHD fixture ships with an SJT power cord Use the information in this section to replace the power cord cap for locations with another electrical standard Because of the variety of power cord caps used worldwide High End Systems Inc cannot make specific recommendations for the power cord cap Contact a local authority for the type of power cord cap needed When installing the power cord cap note that the cores in the mains lead are coloured according to the following code green and yellow earth blue neutral brown live Installing a Line Cord Cap U K Only In the United Kingdom core colours in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the colored markings identifying the terminals in the fixture s plug In that case install a line
190. ier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum yellow saturation Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 ae A gt Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 110 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions CMY Add All Pixels Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 2 This effect increases color values across all pixels including black pixels Modifier 1 Increases cyan color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum cyan saturation Modifier 2 Increases magenta color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum magenta saturation Modifier 3 Increases yellow color component from O no adjustment to 255 10096 maximum yellow saturation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 i Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 111 CHAPTER 13 Effect
191. ifier 2 Adjusts the Saturation color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum saturation Effect Mode Parameter 88 Modifier 3 Adjusts the color tolerance from 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 minimum to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 parameter DMX 38 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 129 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Intensity Key M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 45 This effect turns pixels of a selected intensity transparent or applies the reverse effect Modifier 1 Selects intensity from a DMX value of O no intensity to 255 100 full intensity Modifier 2 Selects intensity bandwidth from a DMX value of 0 narrowest bandwidth to 255 widest bandwidth Modifier 3 Turns selected intensity range transparent from 0 no change to 128 fully transparent DMX values above the midpoint of the range change all intensities outside of the selected range transparent from 129 no transparency to 255 full reverse transparency Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 30 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 75 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 168 130 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Mask Color lObject Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 128 This effect applies color to a selected mask shape Modifier 1 Increases red color component from a DMX value of 0 2
192. ifier 2 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 208 Solarize 3 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 11 Solarize 4 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 12 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 149 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Solid Color RGB M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 16 Solid Color RGB removes the media file texture and allows you to color mix the 3 D object to one solid color Modifier 1 Increases red color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases green color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 ncreases blue color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Transparent Color Y Object Effect M Global Effect These effects remove a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent Modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the transparent color in terms of Red Green and Blue values set in the Modifier parameters Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from DMX values of O no red to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from DMX values of O no green to 255 100 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from DMX values of 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue sa
193. iguration 28 DLHD Digital Light User Manual DMX_Protocol Tab The Protocol sub tab displays the current DMX value being received from a console for each parameter after any conversion such as internal self test or protocol conversion The DMX parameters are grouped into general categories each with a separate tab DMX_Protocol Motion Screen The Motion sub tab displays parameters associated with fixture movement projector control and integrated camera functionality For more information on specific Motion CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Motion Camera Pan 4968 Zoom 32768 Tilt 9516 Focus o Gate 255 Infrared O Focus 204 Shutter O Zoom 0 White Bal 0 MSpeed O Orient O Macro O Effects O Control 0 RedGain O Blue Gain o parameters see Chapter 6 Fixture Motion Functions on page 45 DMX_Protocol _Global Screen The Global sub tab display the current values for parameters that affect the composite image For more information on specific Global parameters see Chapter 11 Global Functions DMX_Protocol _Obj Screens Object sub tabs are labeled from 1 to 9 and display parameter values affecting a single object s content For more information on specific Graphic Function parameters see Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Chapter 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale and Chapter 14 Synchronizing Content Intensity 255 Fil Mode 1 1 0 2 0 3 Fu2Modle 0 10 2 0 J
194. ime to open Iris Press at the same time to Home Ce Jam BABS 34Aq ses 40jp louq Press at the EMI FILTER sophomng V VANA e ec SERVICE WARNING 22 HIGH END SYSTEMS Large Format Error Warning Message Display Status Message Menu Display The fixture menu displays error warning information in two ways The first is the large block format that can be viewed from a distance when the menu is idle When there is more than one message the large format display cycles through the messages Each message displays for 3 seconds before cycling to the next message and continues looping through these messages until they have been cleared internally or you interact with the menu DLHD Digital Light User Manual 275 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Button Action l Status Message List When in the large format display pressing any Prol Cooling button reverts to the normal menu display showing Miter Lite Out Error the Detailed Message Display pane in the BRA OSA SINO a WS xU oW as y my al Info Status tab of the menu At that point you can view the detailed information for the error warning messages or navigate elsewhere Saba Mangan Cortal Inactivity Timer After 30 seconds of inactivity from the display navigation editing buttons has passed the display returns to the large format error display should there be any new messages to be displayed or if th
195. imization Parameters ccccccesesccccceeesnnseeeeesaneeeeeesaneeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeauass 54 a E ERRAT mc ae ee Cee ee 54 COBEESSE te stia E DE MC e AM e e miU 54 Effect Mode Parameters sncnnuenhuuuhhhunARRRRRRRRRRRRRRRARRRARRSERSERRRERARESRRRRAR 55 Xii DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Each Graphic Object s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media file This chapter outlines how to select an image s object and media file components as well as define the video segment and its playback Content OVerVIeW dados 61 Selec Ung Content 60 13 25909 2 ERRUR a 61 Content Selection Parameters 20 so n nanuauuRsRARARASERARERRRREEWERERRREAENEEERNNN NM NE 62 Slo 62 Media Foldon Visas sad ME 63 Media Folder DeSChIDUONS sia 64 Media RS a creas 65 Defining a Media File Segment ccmccccccccccnnnnnccnnnnnnn rr rr 65 In Frame and Out Frame Parameters occccccccccnncncccnnnca cnn nn nnnnnn nn cnn rr 65 Seg ment selection Examples sir is doe ireti eaaa 66 Defining Playback a RARA 67 PlaybacMode PR TER 67 SCILUDDITIO wreath ccna eite oie 67 Play Da CS Pe cd eE T 68 Chapter 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale You can independently control each Graphic Object s rotation direction and speed along with its position and scale in X Y and Z axis directions Rotating a 3 D ODj GCE siiiicccotsiusec
196. information refer to the Projector User Manual that shipped with your fixture 32 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Lens Type Options There are three accessory lenses available for the DLHD Digital Light The default setting for the Lens Type field is Standard When you install a Long throw an Ultra Long throw or a Wide Angle lens you will need to select that lens type to configure your system NOTE The Lens Type field is not active if you are operating this version of the software on a DL 2 fixture Set_I O Screen jz This screen lets you select the Input and Output Projector Input Internal E options for the fixture Projector In By DMX Yes si Use the Projector Input field to select which Video Input External E input the projector should accept When External SVideo Format NTSC M E External is selected the projector takes input SDI Format NTSC puli directly from an external source and bypasses p the internal graphics engine When I nternal is E selected the projector takes input directly from the graphics engine Internal is the default configuration setting Projector I n By DMX toggles the ability to set the projector input via the Control Console Yes is the default and allows the input to be changed via the console No doesn t allow the input to be changed Video Format The SDI Format field lets you select from the SDI formats supported
197. information see Protocol Options on page 49 DL 3 Start Channel 4 Select a Start Channel in the Start Channel field using the up and down arrows to step through the numbers 1 512 See DLHD Channel Range and Valid Start Channel on page 18 For more information see Determining a DMX Start Channel on page 39 16 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Setup Configuration Using the CMA The Content Management Application running on your computer and linked to DL 3 fixtures via Ethernet lets you remotely configure the DL 3 fixtures For more information on the CMA see Chapter 16 Content Management Application CMA on page 249 All the setup configuration selections for DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures can be made in the Server tab To view configuration information for a individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane High End Systems Content Management Application File Configuration Help E All Servers 6 servers Server Display Connectors Art Net amp I O Info Menu Displa amp BB DRK CUBE 1 play yo info play Ea MM Pats AxonHDPro 1 DMX Settings EMI Leftie in Lab 3 Output 1 ES User Media Start Channel 1 Identify l E User Objects Le a ol Protocol hd v Layers 10 v B8 ock
198. ing the CMA All video content to be used in a Synchronization scenario MUST adhere to the High End Systems requirements for encoding custom content for DL 3 DL 2 and Axon servers If the content is not encoded correctly not only will the Network Synchronization not function but other problems with video playback such as stuttering or jumping in the clips can occur DLHD Digital Light User Manual 205 CHAPTER 14 Synchronizing Content Network Synchronization Capabilities As currently implemented it is possible to synchronize movie playback as well as certain graphics effects Movie Playback Synchronization ensures that movie playback between multiple servers stays Synchronized for either collage applications or where multiple servers are playing the same movie clip on different projection surfaces It is especially useful for long movie clips and will solve the problems of frame drift that can be associated with media server playback Certain effects in the graphics engine can also be synchronized between servers Effects such as the ripple effects object wobbulation or color cycle effects need to be synchronized between servers to appear correctly in Collage usage scenarios Programming Synchronization To program synchronization first start by deciding which fixture server will be the master server This can be any server on the network However in a case of mixed computer hardware in the servers the oldest server should
199. installing new motor boards in system Self Test Selecting On starts a test sequence for Pan Pan Tilt and Tilt mechanical functionality Selecting On starts a test sequence for Iris Self Test Iris mechanical functionality Test Self Test Self Test Self Test 1 Off Video TOA nen Selecting a Video Pattern displays a sample Test video to test graphics engine functionality Test Pattern 2 26 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Selecting On starts a test sequence for Zoom mechanical functionality Selecting On starts a test sequence for Focus mechanical functionality CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Main Sub Tabs Fields Clicking Restart reboots the internal media Reboot Media Server Minen Delete User Content om Delete erases all User Content on Clicking Upgrade installs updates to factory content requires connection to the CMA Upgrade Factory Content DLHD Digital Light User Manual 27 CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Menu Screen Descriptions DMX Tab The DMX Tab has sub tabs for configuring the fixture for the DMX link viewing the DMX settings for the fixture on each channel of its range and viewing all 512 channel values on the DMX link DMX_Control Screen Use the Control sub tab to configure your fixture for a DMX link DMX Source defines the source of DMX data and has two options e DMX512 Data is transmitted over standard DMX cables Art Net Data is transmitted over Eth
200. ive Art Mod1 scales RGB Mod2 Scales Color Not color subtract Mod3 not used RGB Subtract Used 114 Exposure Control Mod1 expand contract Expand Color Shift Not color Mod2 color shift Mod3 not used Contract Color Used Special value used with global spherical mapping effect 142 Defaults to O otherwise Special value used with global spherical mapping effect 142 Defaults to O otherwise 055 Pan and Scale zooms in and pans across a Horizontal Vertical Zoom in still image position position and out 60 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Chapter 9 Graphic Functions Defining Content Each Graphic Object s content is composed of a 3 D object overlaid with a media file This chapter outlines how to select an image s object and media file components as well as define the video segment and its playback Content Overview In addition to a royalty free stock digital art collection featuring more than 1 500 lighting optimized files available as stock content you can develop your own custom media files and 3D object files for playback on DL 3 DL 2 or Axon media servers For a quick overview on developing your own custom User content see Appendix B Custom User Content on page 283 The Digital Lighting Product and Support pages at highend com digital lighting offer additional assistance and the latest software and techniques for creating and encoding custom content
201. kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke DLHD incorporates a two stage air filtering system with additional washable prefilters in the head and base housing to reduce these risks to a minimum However you must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture e Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check Do not situate DLHD in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer Minimize the exposure of DLHD to both glycol fog and mineral oil DLHD is a highly complex and sensitive electro optical device and care and thought in how it is used rigged and positioned will maximize the product s life and your investment NOTE Failure to follow these guidelines and carry out regular maintenance Will void the warranty 8 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Mounting the Fixture Upright CAUTION Do not mount the fixture upright without the four rubber feet attached To mount the fixture upright place the fixture on a sturdy stable surface that will support more than the 63 5 kg 140 Ib weight of the DLHD fixture If the surface is above floor height use safety cables to secure the fixture to the surface Truss Mounting When mounting the fixtur
202. king these buttons DLHD Digital Light User Manual 255 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Getting Started Creating a Neu Warp This example shows how to create a simple warp that would be useful for projecting onto a curved fabric screen This process is the same for other types of surfaces as well The steps are the same yet the final results will be much different This process can be done live or off line The editing steps are similar To create a warp for projecting onto a curved fabric screen 1 Launch the warp editor via the CMA by either right clicking on the User Warp folder in the drive tree and selecting warp editor or by choosing 3D Warps from the menu bar The screen will be blank with a Menu Bar down the right side 2 In the Menu Bar under the Geometry sub heading choose the type of primitive that is going to be used as the building block We are going to choose Spline Rectangular Mesh Keep the default values for Bezier Control Points and Bezier Mesh Resolution Note If you wish to change the Bezier Control Points and Mesh Resolution you will need to do it before pressing New 3 Pressing New will generate a new file and this will be displayed in the center window You will notice there are three control points along each edge of the rectangle that has just appeared these are the control points of the warp 4 Select the top center control point by directly clicking the point or drawing a selection box ar
203. ktes k nnen dessen Sicherheit beeintr chtigen und unter Umst nden gegen die diesbez glichen Sicherheitsnormen versto en Avvertenza Sulla Modifica Del Prodotto prodotti di High End Systems sono stati progettati e fabbricati per soddisfare i requisiti delle normative di sicurezza statunitensi ed internazionali Qualsiasi modifica al prodotto potrebbe pregiudicare la sicurezza e rendere il prodotto non conforme agli standard di sicurezza pertinenti Advertencia De Modificaci n Del Producto Los productos de High End Systems est n dise ados y fabricados para cumplir los requisitos de las reglamentaciones de seguridad de los Estados Unidos e internacionales Las modificaciones al producto podr an afectar la seguridad y dejar al producto fuera de conformidad con las normas de seguridad relevantes FCC Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer ence when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference
204. left and right When projecting abutting images adjusting the Edge Fade parameter lets you smooth the line between two images and also allows you to change an object s boundary Default DMX Value 0 all edges are sharp and hard Adjust each side separately for edge fade from O no fade to 255 100 opaque 100 Left Edge Fade 100 Top Bottom Left Right Edge Fade DLHD Digital Light User Manual 93 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Keystone Correction Parameters When you output an image from a Top Left X Top Right X E projector at an angle the image may appear skewed Eight Keystone Top parameters adjust the image shape Left Y Right Y and compensate for this effect You can control each of the four corners of the graphics output to reshape your image to a form that projects Bottom Bottom correctly Left Y Right Y Default DMX Value 0 no keystone LK correction has been applied Bottom Left X Bottom Right X Original Content Each corner has an x and a y value that let you adjust and correct the scale of the projection from any corner toward the image center on that axis Setting all Keystone X and Y parameters DMX values to zero will place the four corners of the image at the four corners of the projector output Adjusting keystone x values toward 255 100 moves the respective x corner positions horizontally toward the center of that image edge Adjusting keystone y values toward 255 100 adju
205. lend Horizontal and Edge Blend Vertical parameters on the Global Layer to adjust the edge blend on each server Execute the panorama Collage 1 1 Select All GLOBAL LAYERS and GRAPHIC LAYER 1 FULL Select a Media Folder and Media File Select All GLOBAL LAYERS BR UJ N Under the Collage Type select Standard available on Slot Toolbar Collage Cony MAP Page DLHD Digital Light User Manual 103 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator 6 Under Collage Config select 1 for a 2x1 Ettecl 7 Mode Edge Bend Hore Collage Conta Collage Con Dr ida E Pengrammetr Kater d Hermer 7 Select each individual GLOBAL LAYER use Collage Cell to assign collage section to each fixture for example select O for the left display device and 1 for the right display device Collage D idus dl 3 resa T Canam Edge Bend Hore Edge Blend Vert Collage Config wpe MAP Page T Programmer Usser i Renumber 8 Select ALL GLOBAL LAYERS under Alignment Control select Pattern Normal Blend This will bring up the standard alignment grid Elect Eegi a Colage J Mode 4 Mode Tree Edge Bend Hore Edge Elend Vert Collage Config Collage Cell MAP Page 1 F Vester d 10 Align the grid using the following e Position e Zoom Focus e Keystone e Keystone Ratio 11 Once grid is aligned Set Alignment Control to Graphics Normal Blend Priti Vaile 4 There are two main steps to process HD footage into
206. lue 0 Round iris Rectangular wrap closes from outside in Tiles closing in DMX values 0 127 0 50 are Horizontal doors closing reserved for static mask shapes Horizontal doors closing from opposing sides Values of 128 255 51 100 are Vertical doors closing from outside in reserved for strobing Mask shapes 3 l Vertical wipe closing from inside out Values not yet implemented default to Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 1 128 Rectangular tiles closing from inside out 2 i a NUES Vertical panels closing from outside in 1 A strobing version of each simple Vertical panels closing from outside in 2 mask shape is defined in the 128 255 51 100 DMX value range When a verica Mamonas strobing mask is selected the strobe Vertical diamonds 2 rate is controlled by the Mask Edge Horizontal diamonds 1 Fade parameter from the slowest 0 Horizontal diamonds 2 to the fastest 255 100 Pinwheel NOTE A Global Effect Mode parameter Oval Iris closing from outside in option lets you define a Mask 28 Oval Iris closing from inside out 29 color see Global Effect Mode A oa 7 157 Oscillating iris closing from outside in Channels on page 80 and Mask ERREA 9 2 Color on page 131 30 Animated dynamic Iris 90 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Mask Size The Mask Size parameter defines mask size for all mask shapes Default DMX Value 255 100 no masking effect When this pa
207. lues below 65 unburn the pattern from 63 slowest to O fastest unburn Values in the upper half of the range create the burn pattern without flames from 192 slowest to 255 fastest burn rate A value of 191 unburns the patterns from 191 slowest to 128 fastest unburn without flames Modifier 2 Adjusts the amount of film blackening around the burn areas from 0 the smallest amount of blackening to 255 100 the largest blackened area Modifier 3 Each DMX value selects one of 255 burn patterns Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 152 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 234 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 211 166 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Film Noise M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 94 This effect creates the effect of scratches on film You can adjust the amount of noise as well as the tint and jitter to give the image an aged film effect Modifier 1 Adjusts the noise rate A DMX value of 128 50 pauses the noise Values below the midpoint adjust the rate from O fastest to 127 slowest Values above the midpoint adjust the rate from 129 slowest to 255 100 fastest Modifier 2 Shifts the color to a sepia tint 128 no adjustment 0 to 127 full sepia Values above the midpoint of the range repeat the push to sepia with jitter added from 129 51 full color and no jitter to 255 100 full sepia and m
208. lug attach the appropriate line cord plug according to the following code brown live blue neutral green yellow earth As the colours of the cores in the mains lead of this equipment may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows the core which is coloured green and yellow must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the earth symbol or coloured green or green and yellow the core which is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured black the core which is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured red Class equipment This equipment must be earthed Equipment suitable for dry locations only Do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture Refer servicing to qualified personnel no user serviceable parts inside DLHD Digital Light User Manual 291 APPENDIX C Safety Information Appendice C Importantes Informations Sur La S curit Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les I ncendies Cet appareil de connection au circuit comporte une protection contre les surcharges de 20 A Mise En Garde Pour Une Protection Permanente Contre Les Chocs lectriques Si cet quipement est livr sans prise de cable veuillez connecter la prise de cable correcte selon le code suivant
209. m offset Sinewave Horizontal M Object Effect JGlobal Effect Sinewave Horizontal w X Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 67 Sinewave Horizontal w Y Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 68 Sinewave Horizontal w Z axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 69 These effects create a horizontal sinewave pattern and then vary the boundaries of the underlying object along the designated axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset 192 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sinewave Vertical M Object Effect Global Effect Sinewave Vertical w X Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 70 Sinewave Vertical ui Y Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 71 Sinewave Vertical w Z Axis Wobbulation Effect Mode parameter DMX value 72 This effect creates a Vertical sinewave pattern and then varies the boundaries of the underlying object along the X axis without affecting the media file that is applied as a texture Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the wobble from 0 no adjust
210. mage in a defined grid Horizontal Vertical betsaom las 49 Color to Alpha varies the transparency level of Red to alpha Green to alpha Blue to alpha an image s component color values Color to Alpha Inverted varies the transparency level of an image s inverted color values 39 Color DeConverge separates image color Moves Red components and offsets them component up d Inverted Red Inverted Green Inverted Blue to alpha to alpha to alpha Crossfade Between Textures Image Scale and Rotate Scales and rotates the Scales image Selects Sets Rotation media file texture applied to a 3 D object Rotation Angle Speed Texture Mixing crossfades between the current Selects Source Selects Source image and another graphic object texture Texture Effect Level Film Roll scrolls the media file texture Horizontal roll Vertical roll Scales horizontally or vertically speed speed Image Pixelate divides the image into rectangles using Sets amount of Scales Scales the center pixel color of each box as its color Pixelation horizontally vertically O Horizontal Vertical Fuzzifier creates a multi image blurring effect Fuzz Decay Drop Shadow creates a scalable drop shadow Horizontal Vertical Shadow behind the graphic object shadow size shadow size opacity Zoom Blur zooms into a position on the Horizontal Vertical Zoom image with a multi image blurring effect position center position center in and out Faux LED divides th
211. ment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase of the wobble from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum offset DLHD Digital Light User Manual 193 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Slats M Object Effect M Global Effect Vertical Slats Effect Mode parameter DMX value 62 Horizontal Slats Effect Mode parameter DMX value 63 These effects render the image in offset slats Modifier 1 Adjusts the number of slats from from a DMX value of 0 no slats to 255 the maximum number of slats Modifier 2 Adjusts the displacement of the slats from a DMX value of 0 no displacement to 255 Original Content image completely removed from screen Modifier 3 When the DMX value for Modifier 1 gt 0 Modifier 3 fades from the original image to the slatted image A DMX value of 0 the original image with no effect applied Increasing the value fades to the slatted image with 255 the slatted image at full opacity Vertical Slat Option Horizontal Slat Option Effect Mode parameter DMX 62 Effect Mode parameter DMX value 63 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 204 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 204 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 40 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 40 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 194 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options D
212. mp Focus wires out through the front of the fixture s head so that the wires can be reconnected to the head logic card Line up the projector mounting holes to the holes on the projector mounting plate Using a 5mm Allen Wrench reattach the 4 projector screws to the mounting plate NOTE Tighten screws once they are all in the projector 7 Reconnect Zoom HD1 and the Focus HD2 cables to the head logic board On the rear of the projector reconnect eProjector Power HDMI eProjector Control Serial Cable CONTROL PORT 9 Replace the top bezel 10 Replace the rear bezel carefully aligning the gasket around the lamp Configuring the fixture for the new lens l Connect fixture to power EE Projector Lamp On El 2 Access the menu system and navigate to s Sig the Set Projector screen Select the installed Projector Powerup La i ig lens from the drop down list options in the Zoom Override 128 3 Off A ii Lens Type field Focus Override 128 Off E Projector Ceiling Off E Standard Zoom Lens Projector Rear Off m Accessory Long Throw Zoom lens Lens Type Standard ls Accessory Ultra Long Throw Zoom lens E ET Projector Defaults Reset Accessory Wide Angle Zoom lens E 270 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Replacing the Fuse WARNINGS AN Disconnect power before servicing Replace fuses with the specified type and rating only A E
213. n information in the right pane Configuration information is grouped under tabs in the right pane Fields are provided for all editable configuration values 234 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA AxonHD Media Server Configuration Options Axon configuration options are grouped under a Server Display Connectors Art Net 1 0 Info and Menu Display tabs Server Tab Server Display Connectors Art Net amp IO Info Menu Display DMX Settings Output 1 Start Channel 1 Identify M Source DMX512 Protocol hd y Layers 10 y Fixture ID 75 Warp Edit off y Number 1 DMX Settings Configuration Item Configuration Value Options DMX Start Channel 1 512 Identify DMX Source DMX512 or Art Net DMX Protocol Sets graphic objects from 1 10 Fixture ID 1 255 Fixture ID Warp Editor Off or On Number DLHD Digital Light User Manual 235 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Display Connectors Tab Server Display Connectors Art Net amp 1 O Info Menu Display Display Connectors Connector 1 Display Device DVI 1 SyncMaster Resolution 1280x1024 Refresh Rate 60 Video Selftest of Media Folder Media File 1 Display Connectors Configuration Item Configuration Value Options Options in the drop down lists are automatically populated by the Axon Refresh Rates software for the specific display device attac
214. n of the pan motor Pan Invert Inverts the direction of the Tilt motor Tilt Invert Pan Tilt Swaps Pan and Tilt directions ME zi Data Loss Closes iris after a 5 minute DMX data loss Timeout Iris Closes iris after a 5 second DMX data loss e de NOTE Unless you select J Off you can adjust display Display Pe a intensity level from 0 100 Turns off display after a period of time Motion 24 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Main Sub Tabs Fields Inverts menu display and navigation Display Turns off the display invert Invert l Automatically inverts display when fixture Fixture mounting is greater than 45 Factory Restores factory default settings Projector Manually turns Projector Lamp on Lamp Manually turns Projector Lamp off Turns the projector lamp on whenever the fixture is connected to power P M Turns on the lamp when Projector Lamp On owerup Turns the projector lamp on with DMX input default On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console Zoom Set value manually from 0 255 Override On Overrides the DMX values sent by the console Focus Set value manually from 0 255 Projector Override Projector Rotates the image 180 around the x axis Projector Rotates the image 180 around the y axis Ur M Long Selects the lens currently installed in the Lens Type ning ning projector Wide Clicking the Reset button restores Factory Projector Defaults
215. n screen programming system you can override zoom and focus using the menu system see Projector Control on page 47 278 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Fem Sm e f the Blue LED is off the Computer isn t receiving power Press and hold the Top and Bottom Tab select buttons to restart computer see Menu Panel Components on page 21 e If the screen is not backlit press the LCD power button see LCD Display The LCD Menu display is off Adjustment Buttons on page 22 Check the Video In Video Out adapter on the video card middle plug connection Check that the connectors for the composite video cable at the LCD Screen and the Video card are seated securely Verify that the last unit on the DMX link is properly terminated see To control the DLHD with DMX you must first enable DMX through the Fixture behaves erratically or menu System see DMX Control Screen on page 28 or the CMA see won t respond to DMX If you re using DMX to control the projector using its native menu system control make sure you send a safe command after each button command otherwise its analogous to pressing a button on the projector menu system and not releasing it see page Projector Control on page 47 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 279 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Frequently Asked Questions How are DLHD fixture I P addresses determined In environme
216. n t see the shadow until you select a Modifier 1 or 2 DMX value above or below 128 50 Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the shadow right as you approach 0 maximum horizontal shadow width Values above the midpoint move the shadow left to a maximum horizontal shadow width at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint move the shadow down as you approach 0 maximum vertical shadow width Values above the midpoint move the shadow up to a maximum vertical shadow width at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the shadow s opacity from O full opacity to 255 100 maximum transparency Tip To ensure that the shadow remains black and is unaffected by other graphic effects apply it as the last effect selected for an image Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX value 255 Modifier 3 parameter DMX value 0 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 161 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge Frame Profiles Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 133 This effect contains three modes that modify the Global I mage Edge Fade parameters to frame the global composite image Modifier 2 and Modifier 3 adjustments vary depending which of the framing modes is selected with Modifier 1 NOTE If the Global Image Edge Fade
217. n the drop down field are available as a starting point for your Warp file The Geometry section of the Editing bar lets you select and configure your sphere Horiz Cylinder Vert Cylinder Cone starting mesh Rectangular Grid The default shape is a Retangular grid Click Rectangular Grid v on New to establish a rectangular mesh Spline Rectangular Grid After selecting the Spline Rectangular Grid set i the number of Beziner Control Points for both horizontal and vertical from 2 to 6 Set the Bezier Grid Resolution to determine the i il 2 7 a 2 smoothness of the bezier curve Then click Bezier Grid Resina 9 y New to create the mesh Note Once you click New the number of Control Points and Grid Resolution cannot be changed until you create another Spline Rectangular Grid DLHD Digital Light User Manual 245 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Sphere RE When you select the Sphere shape you can set the following New fea For Curved Geometnes Inside Surface Select Inside Surface if you want to display the a Centre x y E 0 0 0 0 0 0 sphere as a concave surface Latitude Deg Start 0 NEN 180 You can choose the x y and z coordinates as Longitude Deg Start o IS 180 2 the spherical mesh s centerpoint Define the Latitude and Longitude to choose a portion of the sphere Sphere Default Geometry Centre x y 2 0
218. nal Frame profile to control the Global Fade Edge parameter appearance Frames the image using an Internal Frame profile to control the Global Fade Edge parameter appearance Rendered Graphic Object content is selected at Frame texture using Modifier 3 parameter 2 image clipping changing operation of the Global Image Edge Fade parameters to Emulate Framing Shutters Modifier 2 When the Modifier 1 DMX value O or 1 this channel selects from profiles that vary in gradient density or pattern When Modifier 1 DMX value 2 this Modifier is not used Modifier 3 When Modifier 1 DMX Value 1 this parameter determines how to use the rendered Graphic Object content as a texture for the frame When Modifier 1 DMX value 2 this Modifier is not used A A DMX Value DMX wie atom o pwp S BE Graphic Object 2 texture including its first applied Effect Graphic Object 2 texture including its first two applied Effects 2 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 163 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Faux LED M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 55 This effect divides the image into a grid of circles that mimic an LED wall The color of the center pixel in each cell defines the solid color for that circle You can control LED size background and color peaking Modifier 1 Controls the LED size The default DMX value of O displays a 100 x 100 grid of LEDs Increasing the DMX value d
219. ndividual graphic objects After setting up and configuring your media server as outlined in Chapter 2 use the following steps to get to the point of displaying output Add one of each type in the Fixture Schedule shown in the Fixture Window After adding each type assign it to a DMX universe The simplest setup would assign fixture types with no empty channels between fixtures Each fixture type of an Axon or a Digital Light media server has an intensity setting e Motion Intensity to opens the physical shutter Available on Digital Light Fixtures only Global Intensity sets the intensity of the composite image Graphic Intensity sets Layer Opacity To view the projected output set the intensity value of each type to 100 If you are having trouble viewing output double check that all default setting are being sent to the fixture If you are using a different control board please ensure that all DMX channels patched for the fixture match the default values DLHD Digital Light User Manual 43 CHAPTER 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start 44 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 6 Fixture Motion Functions This chapter describes mechanical movement control for DLHD fixtures Pan and Tilt DLHD fixtures have a 400 pan range and a 240 tilt range Two DMX channels for Pan and two for Tilt provide 16 bit position adjustment to a fraction of a degree MSpeed values can control the timing of pan and tilt mo
220. ne displays all the configuration values for that server in the right pane Selecting All Configuration displays the combined configuration values for all the servers on the network For more information on server configuration see Viewing Server Configuration on page 233 Viewing Content You can view information about media folders and files within each folder in a table format NOTE Clicking on a column heading sorts the table according to the values in that column 2 All Servers 3 servers File Count Date E 92902AAA 0 HES Core HD 1080p 1 12 14 2013 10 10 14 AM H A3904178 0 A Luna Blue 2 E 12 14 2013 10 05 20 AM EMI AxonHDProTG 100 L3Art Beats 3 13 12 14 2013 10 04 15 AM H E User Media Beacon 4 22 12 14 2013 10 05 51 AM l User Objects O FeedBack Video 5 29 12 14 2013 10 06 31 AM ER User Warps 5 Kristine_Schomaker 6 23 12 14 2013 10 11 35 AM 2 Stock Media O Rabit_Hole_Creative T 20 12 14 2013 10 11 56 AM j E Stock Objects C Showfootage 8 28 12 14 2013 10 12 25 AM E All Configuration 9 William Strother 9 35 12 14 2013 10 13 36 AM FeedBack Video Doors Curtains 10 10 12 14 2013 10 06 51 AM O FeedBack Video Marriage 11 52 12 14 2013 10 07 35 AM O FeedBack Video Religious 12 32 12 14 2013 10 08 08 AM BHES Core 13 39 12 14 2013 10 08 55 AM 9 HES_Digital_Aerials_1 14 108 12 14 2013 10 10 30 AM 9 HES_Oils 15 14 12 14 2013 10 11 14 AM Viewing Folders Clic king on a media folder in the left pane reveals i
221. nformation about any sub folders it contains Name of the Media File collection This value is editable for User content See Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders on page 219 DMX is the currently assigned DMX value for the folder This value can be auto assigned and edited for User content See Editing User Content DMX Values on page 220 File Count of files in this collection Date the folder was last modified 216 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Viewing Files Double clicking on a media folder in the left pane reveals information about its content files High End Systems Content Management Application File Media Files Help HIGH END SYSTEMS 8 All Servers 9 servers B DL 3 One 1 E Bal Chum HD mpa mpg 1 33 935 KB 1024 768 417 30 0 13 90 no 2 19 2008 6 26 04 PM User Media Beach Waves HD mpa mpg 2 68 359 KB 1024 768 840 30 0 28 0 no 2 19 2008 6 26 11 PM User Objects Blob Holes HD mpg mpg 3 56 249 KB 1024 768 768 30 0 25 60 no 2 19 2008 6 27 04 PM E Breading Bullets HD mpg iS 4 78125 KB 1024 768 960 30 0 32 0 no 2 19 2008 6 27 15 PM Q Vous M E Bubble Texture HD mpa mpg 5 29 297 KB 1024 768 360 30 012 0 no 2 19 2008 6 27 18 PM C3 Hes O k 3 E Bubbles Rapid mpa mpg 6 29 296 KB 768 576 480 30 0 16 0 no 2 19 2008 6 27 21 PM 3 HES Atmospheric 4 E Bubbles mpg mpa 7 23 437 KB 640 480 480 30 0 16 0 no 2 19 2008 6 27 39
222. ng the Wholehog Wheelset preferences for DL 2 and DL 3 fixtures will provide a more intuitive order to encoder layout on the console see http www flyingpig Patching Digital Light Fixtures and Axon Media Servers Digital Lighting servers are patched as multiple fixture types in the Wholehog library systems This allows for ease of programming as well as the ability to adjust quickly for any of the various DMX protocol options The Motion fixture type controls the actual moving yoke projector and integrated camera in DL 2 and DL 3 fixtures The Global fixture type controls the global graphic engine functions such as intensity keystone correction viewpoint etc The Graphic fixture type controls each graphic object functions such as opacity object media An Axon media server has no motion control but utilizes the same Global and Graphic fixture types In the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures window of Wholehog software you would add 1 motion 1 global and 9 graphic fixtures for each complete DL 3 4 graphic fixtures for each DL 2 or 1 global and 9 graphic fixtures for each complete Axon 4 graphic fixtures for an original Axon The best way to organize your patching is to assign user numbers for these items Patch the motion first the global second and the graphic fixture types last For example set up user numbers that correspond to the DL 3 fixture number 1 where user number 1 motion user num
223. nnccnnonnnnnnconnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnanrrnnnnna 281 Appendix A DLHD Specifications Fixture mechanical electrical optical and component specifications are listed MechaniCdl urnas 285 a t S A NO 286 COmpUter sreud a a a a aaa aaa aa 286 PFOLOCCEOR A a a a 286 OPC ATION 255 us spas sa uesEERESRDEEEERRRSSUEREEASEREEEEERNXMME KYNN ER UMEN MEN UNAM M E RU RH RU RR NR RR CUR RR 287 ENVIA aa 287 Cables and Connectors ccscceeeeee cece eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeenuenueeeeeeeuuseeusenuesnuesnaus 287 MIA CO CONNECT ante cia 287 Peripheral Network Connectors oocccocccccccccccnnco conc eens cana n aran nr rr 287 DMX and RS 455 Projector LINK ia le 288 Appendix B MSpeed Conversion Table This table lists the MSpeed motor movement times and their corresponding DMX controller values Appendix C Safety Information Appendice C Importantes Informations Sur La S curit oococcccccccconnccnnncnnnnnos 292 Anhang C Wichtige Hinweise F r Ihre Sicherheit ooooocccccccoccccccccnnn cnn 293 Ap ndice C Informaci n Importante De Seguridad essen 294 Appendice C Importanti Informazioni Di Sicurezza sese 295 VIGUG SikkerhedsinfOFPmablOli astas sene Hopper eed a pO DL Meta stove 295 xxii DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter I Product Overview This chapter describes the features of the DL 3 Digital Light and the Content Management Application software The DLHD High Definition Digit
224. ns selected hue and saturation Hue Saturation 87 l l l Tolerance and turns everything else gray Coordinate Coordinate HS to Transparent retains selected hue and Hue Saturation saturation and turns everything else i Tolerance Coordinate Coordinate transparent HS Selected To Transparent makes selected Hue Saturation E Tolerance hue and saturation transparent Coordinate Coordinate Texture Shift shifts texture coordinate by color Horizontal Vertical Color value Shift Shift and Scale Lens Grid views texture through grid of lenses Magnification Edge Shading 92 Edge Detect BW2 detects edges as black or Sample dge Threshold Detected Edge white Distance Comparison Scaler 93 Film Burn Unburn creates burn pattern over Burn Through Film Burn image Rate Blackening Pattern B Push to Sepia Film Noise creates an aged film look add Jitter 58 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Name Description Adjustments 95 Particle System 1 converts image to a particle Emitter Trail Particle pattern Type Length Acceleration Particle System 2 adds adjustments to Effect Number of Particle Emitter 95 Particles Size Size 97 Particle System 3 adds adjustments to Effect Initial Particle Particle Particle 95 Effect 96 Velocity Rotation Lifetime Prism Number Refraction Rotation of Facets Index Gaussian Halo creates blur from a clear center Sample Number of Gaussian toward edges Distance Filter Passes
225. ntally Modifier 2 DMX values from 0 127 have no effect DMX values of 128 50 to 255 100 flips the image vertically Modifier 3 Not used Original content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 128 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 169 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Fuzzifier M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 57 This effect offsets multiple images of the media file texture to blur the image and lets you control image scaling at the same time Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment Increasing DMX values blur the image horizontally to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 2 The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment Increasing DMX values blur the image vertically to a maximum at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Adjusts the decay level of the blurred edge from 0 no adjustment to maximum full decay at 255 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 100 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 255 100 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 170 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Gaussian Blur M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 81 More precise than Fuzzifier effect this effect creates a true blur effect utilizing a gaussian curve Modifiers 1 and Modifier 2 combine to create the ef
226. ntrast adjustment Black Level adjustment e Tint adjustment Restore returns the screen to the factory defaults The two Menu Select buttons are used to adjust the currently selected function NOTE Display Black Level can also be controlled by the menu system see Set Tab on page 31 22 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 3 The Digital Light Menu System Navigating the Menu Select any Menu tab by pressing l i Universe Subnet Hd SIN21SAS QN3 HDIH SE the corresponding button to the e 113 11 ais E gt El side of the display A tab will be hd Start B annel O a ou ay 01010101010 Projector bold when selected Use the left Ch and right arrow keys on the a v2 navigation buttons to move to 1 the Sub Menu tab column EH Status Server Power Press the Tab select button that corresponds to the Sub Menu tab you want and press the lt Enter gt SUD MENU Menu Enter Menu Navigation button button to select Tab Select buttons Use the multidirection button to move left right up down to a field The currently selected field will be highlighted Press the lt Enter gt button to go into edit mode for the selected field A list box will open to show all the options for that field Use the Up Down keys to scroll through the items in the list highlighting the current item Pressing the lt Enter gt button again stores the selection and closes the list Pressing t
227. nts that utilize numerous DLHDs is there risk of I P address conflicts DLHD fixture IP addresses are determined one of two ways 1 When using DHCP server like router IP is generated automatically 2 Without router IP is generated randomly by Windows called Auto IP The generation of IP addresses is handled just as IP addresses are handled for Window networks Is there a limit to the Ethernet cable run length from the fixtures to the CMA Ethernet Cat 5 limit is 100 meters For longer distances use a router that takes fiber input to Cat 5 output as for typical Ethernet distribution What is the longest length High End Systems has tested for camera video distribution High End has tested up to 1000 feet of quality Cat 5 without noticing degradation of signal Does DLHD support the file format MPEG 4 MPEG 4 is not currently supported Convert original graphics and video to MPEG 2 280 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter I8 Restoring the System You can perform a system restore on a DL 3 Axon or DL 2 Server with your System Restore CD A system restore will replace the following components e Microsoft Windows Embedded Operating System Application The system restore does not replace the Settings the Stock content or User content Hardware Requirements Caution Contact High End Systems Support http www highend com PRI OR to initiating a Full Restore A system restore can be done to replace the O S par
228. nuing this deletion process while editing control points 1 ura cre a Y B De mms rra Lr be an a l P AE TA eel sE ian uh DE J Limo Bim Jm Hem D he Pre ee Errar 4 Be o meal io Ales Piers Cun TA A agas ae cim 1 pr ru 3 33 3 1 Tef ANT 258 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor Adding Geometry to Mesh If there is a hole in the mesh and details need to be created Faces can be added inside the warp editor Using the example mesh below we can illustrate ways to add faces By using Shift Right Mouse Click geometry can be added and the location is determined in multiple ways 3 points are always needed to determine a new face 1 By selecting 2 points the face will be created between those two points and the third point will be inferred at the location of the mouse pointer ES om a in pos B a ia T a ii T z a ae x Me iz n on e n nN i as e a A n T a v hs ae am Tn s ol a a sra a a d aa a a te E me ai mn ma Bon 2 T e a Tay ma m s m a e PL t T m sa e a i E o 2 en e ES a an E m T Lan a a x E E ae Tiss ae tm a y ne a B i e w in e an a TE k mae w e a e Ti _ a le a as x E oe han y
229. o display on a 3 D object you can choose from several Playback Modes and assign a Playback Speed Playback Mode A Playback Mode parameter for each 3 D image allows several playback options Default DMX Value 0 Plays forward in a continuous loop Play forward looping Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame setting looping continuously Play forward once Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame setting and holds on the last frame Stops playback at the frame currently playing Play forward once if opacity gt Plays the media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame 0 setting and holds on the last frame Plays only when the content opacity value is greater than zero Play forward if opacity gt 0 Plays media segment from In Frame setting to Out Frame 4 setting looping continuously Plays only when the content opacity value is greater than zero Pause and rewind Stops playback at the frame currently playing then jumps to 3 the In Frame setting Scrub In Frame Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame parameter Scrub Out Frame Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame f parameter Scrub In Frame with statistics Displays frame that has been defined by the In Frame parameter with media file data overlaid on the output Scrub Out Frame with Displays frame that has been defined by the Out Frame statistics parameter with media file data overlaid on the output Scrubbing
230. o one or more other servers on the network see page 228 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 213 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Delete Content removes all the user content from the server Create Content Archive lets you back up all the server s user content to a compressed file see page 227 Deploy Content Archive restores user content to the server from the backup see page 227 Upgrade Software allows you to upgrade fixture software For more information on upgrade options see Upgrading Software on page 231 e DMX Summary provides a web based summary of a server s content in a table format Download Log provides useful troubleshooting information to Customer Service if needed Identify will cause a fixture to strobe so you can find it in the rig Content Organization The media server on each fixture has a file system that holds the E All Servers 4 servers movies images 3 D objects and User Warp files that make up the gl 92902AAA 0 EMI 9904178 0 content that the server uses cll AxonHDTG 75 ese AxonHDProTG 100 These files folders and their DMX values are collectively known as the fi J User Media Content on the media server oOo F 2 User Objects p E User Warps a E Stock Media Es iE Stock Objects preloaded Stock content or custom User content and type Media files All Configuration or 3 D Object files The CMA Client Window organizes and iden
231. o step through grid pattern you selected with the Modifier 1 channel As you dial through Modifier 2 the selected cell in the grid is 100 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator highlighted DMX values of 128 255 default to the upper left corner of the grid Array Size e E gt X N 2 E i Selected cell Selecting any value larger then the number of grid rectangles defined by the Collage Config Selection parameter or values from 128 255 defaults to the top left rectangular area of the grid Collage Blending Adjustment The Collage Blending Adjustment parameter lets you select from a variety of blend curves to control the edge blending of the adjacent projections Standard color blend curve No adjustment 1 33 Standard color blend curve with intensity reduction adjustment 1 maximum reduction 34 Standard color blend curve No adjustment 35 63 Standard color blend curve with increasing intensity 63 maximum increase 64 95 Gray scale blend curve with reduced intensity adjustment 64 maximum reduction 6 Gray scale blend curve No adjustment Gray scale blend curve with increasing intensity 127 maximum increase DLHD Digital Light User Manual 101 CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Alignment Pattern Control The Adjustment Pattern Control parameter lets you determine how to view the cell as you apply the selected blend curve
232. ocus DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 1 Product Overview Related Products and Accessories The following table lists related products and accessories available for the DL 3 fixture For more information contact your High End Systems dealer distributor see Contacting High End Systems on page ii 4 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter e Setup and Configuration Hardware setup includes mounting connecting to power and establishing Ethernet and DMX links Software setup includes launching the Content Management Application CMA and configuring the fixture for DMX control Hardware Setup The following steps make up the hardware setup for DLHD fixtures Unpack DLHD Media Server Install power cord cap if necessary for your location Mount the fixture upright or suspended from a standard truss pun H Connect to an Ethernet network linked to a computer or an Axon media server running CMA software and any other DLHD DL 3 or Axon units you wish to control via the CMA 5 Connect the fixture to a DMX controller via DMX cabling or Art Net on the Ethernet network 6 Connect the fixture to power Unpacking the Fixture Your DLHD fixture ships in a road case specifically designed to protect the product during transport When unpacking inspect both the outside of the fixture and the projector for physical damage to components Your fixture ships with the following e One DLHD fixture in road case
233. odifier parameter to control the All in One control option This option helps you visualize what the graphics engine is doing The All in One option maps the media file content of Collage and Curved Surface support effects as well as up to three effects applied to graphics objects and displays it in a multi quadrant grid These effects are accessed according to rendering hierarchy used by the graphics engine see Graphics Control Hierarchy on page 49 When the Global Control parameter is set to the All In One option you can view the individual effects applied to each Graphic object in the Global Control Modifier parameter es Global Control Modifier Option Global Control parameter 253 0 Displays each defined Graphic Object with no effects applied Displays the first effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object Displays the second effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object Displays the third effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object As the next effect level is displayed Displays the fourth effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object sach object displays the highest level of effect applied to that 6 Displays the sixth effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object point Displays the seventh effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object 9 Displays the eighth effect if any applied to any defined Graphic Object Displays the fifth effect if any applied to any defined Grap
234. ofiles defines edge fading Selects Adjusts Selects 133 i patterns Mode Profile Source Curve Correction Vertical Convex Cylinder Adjusts Sets Vertical 135 one l Not Used corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Curve Correction Vertical Concave Cylinder Adjusts Sets Vertical 136 Mdh l Not Used corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Curve Correction Vertical Inside Corner Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal 137 die l corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Center 138 Curve Correction Vertical Outside Corner Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal corrects shape projecting on curved surface Correction Center Center Curve Correction Outside Sphere corrects Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal 139 ia l shape projecting on a sphere s outside surface Correction Center Center DLHD Digital Light User Manual 85 109 110 OO D NO 00 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions DMX ipti Adjustments esie Medifieri Wodifier2 Modiferi Curve Correction Inside Sphere corrects Adjusts Sets Vertical Sets Horizontal 140 dis dod l shape projecting on a sphere s inside surface Correction Center Center 142 Spherical Mapping Outside maps output toa Sets Longitude Sets Latitude Sets Latitude portion of a sphere s outside surface Angle Angle Center 1 Spherical Mapping Inside maps output to a Sets
235. older 255 is selected the video capture DMX assignments are as follows DMX 1 Standard definition SDI source 1 DMX 2 Standard definition SDI source 2 To switch between SDI in and SDI out access the Motion Control parameters through your DMX console The iris does not have to be closed for the switch to happen Note the following when using the SDI video input and output option While capturing SDI anything that is being fed to the In SDI port will be mirrored on the Out port Therefore it is possible to daisy chain fixtures together via SDI allowing multiple DLHD fixtures to have the same SDI feed without a switcher splitter device The frame delay on the SDI capture is nearly identical to that of the S video capture The difference cannot be seen with the naked eye 38 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start If you are new to DMX programing this chapter gives you a brief overview on programming DLHD DL 3 Axon HD and Axon media servers and an example of using a Wholehog console to patch and display output from a media server DMX Programming Overview DMX5le Links A lighting console typically utilizes a protocol called DMX512 to communicate with automated lighting fixtures and conventional dimmers This protocol consists of 512 unique channels of control per output link universe Typically a lighting fixture or device will use a channel for each parameter s
236. olor scheme to new color scheme using selected intensity Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 125 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 200 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 100 114 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color to Alpha Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 49 This parameter varies the transparency level of an image s component color values Modifier 1 Increases the red component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 full red opacity intensity Modifier 2 Increases the green component opacity or intensity from O no adjustment to 255 10096 full green opacity intensity Modifier 3 Increases the blue component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full blue opacity intensity Original Content Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 60 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 75 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 240 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 115 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color to Alpha Inverted M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 50 This parameter varies the transparency level of the inverse of an image s component color values Modifier 1 Increases the inverse red component opacity or intensity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full green and blue opacity intensity Modifier 2 Increases the green component opacity or inten
237. omposed of series of horizontal bands Modifier 3 Reduces the box size vertically to centerpoint from O no reduction to 255 100 full reduction At that point the image becomes a series of vertical bands Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 93 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 7 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 0 186 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Pixel Twist M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 34 This effect introduces a twisted area to the image and allows to you size it and move it in the image Modifier 1 Controls the horizontal position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of output Modifier 2 Controls the vertical position of the twisted area s centerpoint from O top edge to 255 100 bottom edge of output Modifier 3 Controls the direction and amount of twist At the midpoint of the range there is no change in the image The twist area and size moves counterclockwise from 128 50 smallest area to O largest twist area moving counterclockwise The twist area and size moves clockwise from 128 50 smallest area to 255 100 largest twist area moving clockwise Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 134 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 106 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 193 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 187 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Prism Effect Mode parame
238. on Off is the default setting Setting the Tilt Invert field to On inverts the direction of the tilt motor Use this option to coordinate movements between fixtures facing each other in a vertical orientation Off is the default setting Setting Pan Tilt Swap field to On swaps the pan and tilt motor operation to coordinate movements between fixtures mounted perpendicular to each other Off is the default setting Timeout Option The Dimmer Iris closes when it stops receiving DMX data for a designated time interval Use the Data Loss Timeout Iris field to set the DMX data loss time interval as Long 5 minutes or Short 5 seconds Short is the default setting After 10 minutes of no data the fixture will shut down the projector and the motion functions Fans remain on to maintain the temperature control for the internal graphics engine Display Options The Display field lets you adjust the black level of the Menu display with the following options e On is the factory default e Preview displays the most recent media change of any Graphic function when opacity gt 0 The Menu screen displays content in both partial and full screen The Preview function can be enabled from the menu system the CMA as well as remotely via DMX When Preview is enabled a partial full color video is shown on the LCD display along with the folder file and DMX information If there is no change of content on any Graphic Function it will automatically
239. on All Home screen or from the DMX console see page 46 See Cleaning and Replacing Filters on page 264 See Cleaning and Replacing Filters on page 264 See Replacing the Lamp The Lamp is nearing the end On page 267 276 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Check the Comm cable Projector The system is unable to connections at serial port on Communication PROJ COMM ERROR communicate to the the back of projector and at Error Projector the fixture head card Make sure lamp is struck Projector Projector temperature has Temperature Fail PROJ TEMP ERROR exceeded operational range Error and has shutdown Cool fixture and then restrike Projector Projector is over the lamp Temperature PROJ TEMP WARN recommended operating Warning temperature USB port The PC failed to initialize Communication USB INIT ERROR USB communication with the l Error box card Contact High End Systems USB port Securit USB failed to pass the E port Security i EEE ERE hardware security test System State LEDs Five labeled LEDs on the display panel indicate the following system activity Color Description es E ME DAA On Projector lamp is on Projector White rM Projector lamp is off m Projector lamp is either cooling down or in a indeterminate state On 45 sec On 1 4 sec Off Running normal motion control code Status Gre n Blinking Blinking Board communication activity
240. onizing output between fixtures e Assign a valid Start Channel the first channel in the unique range of DMX channels designated by the console for this Axon All these selections can be made in the Server tab for all models of media servers 1 To view configuration information for an individual server click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA window and select the to view all the servers on the fixture network Select a server in the left pane to view its configuration information in the right pane Ed High End Systems Content Management Application JO Es j File Configuration Help s HIGH END SYSTEMS as 2 pa 9 m Server Fixture Lamp Test Reset Hardware yo one 7 1 User Media DMX Settings Version Information E User Objects DMX Start Channel f1 Software 2 0 0 2372 14 Stock Media IC Stock Objects Source JArt Net XPe 2 2 0 i pe DL 3 two 2 DL 3 Three 3 Artnet Subnet fi Firmware 1 5 4 156 iL User Media Ea User Objects ArtNet Universe 1 8 1 Stock Media DMX Protocol yz f E Stock Objects DL 2 four 4 TE Mu NT m DL 3 Five 5 r Server Info r Misc m User Media Model DL3 C User Objects Fixture ID Fixture Defaults On x 5 Stock Media C3 Stock Objects Fixture Name DL 3 one Reboot Server SAM Axon one 11 A c User Media IF Address 169 254 153 131 c User Objects Unique Number 92902441 EHE Stock Media Disk Free Space 279 74
241. ony Digtal 26 pom C HES Setup and Test 35 y Y Ih Strick Mhiante Ms VM 31 Files Disk Free Space 271 38 GB Chent IP 10 2 IL HES Lithopattems 2 22 ose SD Mekmpeg 17 SD Meldmpg 18 SD_Phase mpg 19 SD Pineapple mpc 20 218 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Managing User Media and Object Content All Stock and User content can be viewed and refreshed but you have additional control over other aspects of your custom content Within the CMA Client Window you can e Rename user files and folders Delete files and folders e Control DMX value assignment to files and folders e Move files and folders between your local drive and a media server Naming and Deleting User Content Files and Folders You can Rename any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window using the pull down Media Folders Objects or 3D Warp menu or with a right click selection Use the standard Windows operating system naming conventions You can Delete any user content folder or file displayed in the right pane of the CMA window using the pull down Media Folders Objects or 3D Warp menu or with a right click selection NOTE You cannot Delete a movie if the media server is playing it Assigning DMX Values to User Content The DMX Value associated with each file and folder makes it easy to use the DMX control protocol to identify a unique media file or object
242. or next fixture on the DMX link 3 Continue linking the remaining fixtures connecting a cable from the Data Out connector of each fixture to the Data In connector of the next fixture on the link 4 Connect a male terminator to the Data Out connector of the last fixture in the link see Powering On the Fixture on page 13 For information on obtaining a terminator see Related Products and Accessories on page 4 You can construct a terminator according to the specifications listed in Cables and Connectors on page 359 Setting up an Ethernet Fixture Link DL 3 fixtures utilize an Ethernet network to synchronize playback and access the CMA software for remote content management and fixture configuration If you are using a DMX console and other automated lighting products compatible with Art Net this network can also serve as the link for DMX control Linking Configurations The following diagrams show configuration options for linking DL 3 fixtures to each other via Ethernet for accessing the Content Management Application running on your computer and to the DMX512 link for DMX desk control DLHD Digital Light User Manual 11 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Q I1 A Road Hog Fullboar Console DMX 512 Data Cabling Ethernet Cabling Ethernet Switch Laptop Computer Optional Road Hog Fullboar Console DMX 512 Data Cabling Ethernet Cabling Configuration Option 2 12 DLHD Digital Light User Manual
243. ound it this operation is completed with the Left Mouse Button The selection will Latch to the control point Remember you must explicitly de select the point when you are finished editing it using the Right Mouse Button 5 To edit the point you have just selected press and hold the Left Mouse Button away from the control point Note The selection and de selection operation is specifically different from the editing operation to let you look at the projection screen and not worry about your mouse position on the CMA screen Trying to combine the two steps will switch the selection mode between box and direct while you are actually meaning to edit 6 Repeat the selection edit de selection process for all the control points that need editing 7 Check Force output 1 to view the output in the warp you have just created Deleting Geometry from Mesh While editing a mesh it is possible to add and delete triangles to create masked areas Note This process only works on triangular meshes rectangular grid sphere cylinder and cone it will not work on the spline mesh type 256 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor To delete a triangle right mouse click over the triangle you wish to delete The triangle will disappear and a black area will show up on the mesh DLHD Digital Light User Manual 257 CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor More complex meshes can be created by conti
244. p comes from What about music hear you can use 8 bars for free 8 bars for free is a fallacy that has been passed around as a fact for a long period of time However it isn t true Both musical compositions and records require licensing and payment What about High End Systems material included with Axon and DL 2 media servers Do have to clear that No High End Systems has worked to provide clearance for the content that is provided with Axon and DL 2 media servers Any materials you received directly from HES with the purchase of a new media server have already been properly licensed for your use in shows and presentations That does not however license you to sell this content separately from High End Systems media servers Also please be sure that any new content you obtain from outside sources is properly cleared for public presentation This sounds really difficult and don t know how to do it What do do to properly license copyrighted material You need to consult with a Content Clearing House or with a properly licensed Intellectual Property Attorney Content clearinghouses are typically less expensive to work with and have well established industry relations that can result in cost savings High End Systems uses and highly recommends Suzy Vaughan Associates Suzy Vaughan Associates has 20 years of experience in clearing clips talent and music for use in any number of venues Their clients include Barbara Streisand Michael
245. p to RBG Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 42 This effect allows you to swap colors All green values become blue and all blue values become green Red values are unaffected Modifier 1 No change to red color component Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 red Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 192 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 Scan Line Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 32 Maps image color intensities to the colors in a single horizontal line of the selected texture Modifier 1 Selects a line of the media file to scan Modifier 2 Adjusts the mapping transition Modifier 3 Not used 146 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Sharpen Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 82 Manipulates edges of image components to sharpen contrast between them Modifier 1 Selects a sample distance from a minimum at a DMX value O to a maximum at a DMX value 255 Modifier 2 Selects the number of filter passes from a minimum at a DMX value O to a maximum at a DMX value 255 Modifier 3 Selects the scale sharpen coefficients at DMX values from 0 255 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 128 Modifi
246. page 219 Size of file in kilobytes Width in pixels Height in pixels Frame Count Frame Rate in frames per second Movie Length in hr min sec e Date the file was last modified DLHD Digital Light User Manual 217 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA You can access several options for displaying files in the right pane through the drop down menu or by right clicking in the right pane when files are being displayed Hieh End Systems Content Management Application Thumbnails Small Thumbnails Medium Thumbnails Large 1 Stock Media 2 HES_Core 1 iE HES Digtal_Aenale 1 2 IL HES Ois 3 A FeedBack Vid SD_Arcticightmpg 5D Batview2 mpg SD Beerush mpg 4 5D Bubbles mpg E IZ HES_Atmosphenc 4 m a 3 iE On The Wall Studios 5 E Sean Bridwell 6 iC A Luna Blue 7 mn Feedback Video 8 788 7 i2 HES Texture 3 SD Ceud007 npo SD Cleud l mpg 5D_Dashmpg 8 SD Deep lmpgiS SD Fitmpg 10 IC HES Foliage 10 n ix Li lE HES Religious 11 D Artbeats 15 SD aD mpg SD ue Ti mpg SD Gridipplempg SD Kaleb mpg 14 SD m n ic HES Gothic 12 CQ HES_Digtal_Aenals_2 13 lE HES Theme amp ils 14 Ic Apollo Glass 15 lE DHA TapMac 17 13 IC Bescon_Digi_Gobos 18 AE Amorphous_Digi_Gobos 13 5 InbaF 20 G HES_Lithopattems_1 21 Ey HES Logos 23 E HES Hi Res 24 iC Nasa Images 25 Blue P
247. parameter controls the text color Shutdown and Reset Options When the Global Intensity parameter is set to 0 you can Shutdown the server DMX Value 120 130 or Reset the internal Graphics Engine for either DL 3 Axon or DL 2 media servers DMX Value 145 149 On Screen Statistics Spherical Control Statistics When the Global Control parameter is set to a DMX value 252 Spherical Control Statistics are displayed and the Global Control Modifier parameter selects text color page 324 Performance Statistics When the Global Control parameter DMX value 254 performance statistics are projected on screen These are a subset of the statistics shown when Global Control 255 Statistics displayed are e render loops per second cpu utilization hard disk read cue length available memory The Global Control Modifier controls the opacity of the of the statistics display background fading from O opaque to 255 transparent Discussion of the global control modifier is on page 325 and should include discussion of background opacity control Text Color When the Global Control parameter is set at a DMX Value of 255 the Global Control Modifier parameter lets you choose the text color that will best display over your selected image DLHD Digital Light User Manual 87 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions All in One Control Option When the Global Control parameter is set to a DMX value 253 you can use the Global Control M
248. peed of your USB drive it will take between 3 5 minutes load During this time a number of small windows will appear and disappear Wait until you see a full screen menu titled Axon System Restore Menu or DL 2 System Restore Menu DL2 System Restore Menu EXIT ee O am gme m pa am XJ m Restore v1 6 Using the lt Tab gt key on your keyboard or using your mouse select the system restore option or Exit to cancel the operation 7 The next page will ask you to confirm your selection Press Confirm and the restore will begin Click Confirm to begin a System Restore Cancel 282 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 18 Restoring the System 8 Allow the restore to run This will take between 10 30 minutes depending on the speed of your USB drive Status will be displayed throughout the restore Microsoft DiskPart version 5 1 3565 Copyright C 1999 26803 Microsoft Corporation On computer IMAGE BUILDER Status Partitioning hard drive DLHD Digital Light User Manual 283 CHAPTER 18 Restoring the System 9 When this part of the restore is completed the media server will automatically restart Restore completed successfully Your machine will restart automatically in 15 seconds NOTE Please wait until after your device restarts to remove the System Restore media and the USB drive 10 After allowing a few minutes for the media server to reconfigure the upgrade is complete you may
249. pg mpg 8 48 330 KB 1024 768 de 24 20 4 E Sean Bidwell E Color Sine HD mpg mpg 3 21 872 KB 1024 768 300 30 010 0 3 A Luna Blue 7 E Colored Crust HD mpg mpg 10 75 358 KB 1024 768 926 30 0 30 86 2 Feedback Video 8 El Contiale HD mpg mpg 11 27 992 KB 1024 768 344 30 0 11 46 i3 HES Texture 5 E Desp Dowrn mpg mpg 12 87 B30 kB E40 490 1800 30 1 8 0 E HES Fokage 10 E DignalMuli Calo HD mpg mpg 13 93 925 KB 1024 768 1127 30 037 56 5 HES Religous 11 E DigralSine HD mpg mpg 14 24414 KB 1024 768 300 30 w10 0 2 HES Gethc 12 E Dizco Ball mpg mpg 15 17 578 kB ED 480 360 30 012 n 1 HES Digital Aerials E Dunes HD mpg mpg 16 33751 KB 1024 768 1152 30 0 38 40 2 HES Theme Stil 1 7 Dust DiakHD mpg mpg 17 78 287 KB 1024 768 952 an 32 B ES Apollo Glass 15 EJ Explosion mpg mpg 18 2993 KB 540 480 62 30 02 6 Tab Artbeats 16 E Epe CulturesFadesHD mpg mpg 13 34 863 KB 800 eno 30 0 15 80 2 Medii INR E Fast CarCommae mpg mpg 20 187 255 KB 640 480 3540 30 158 0 ES Amorehous Digi Gel E Fip Clock HD mpg mpg 21 3 665 KB 1024 768 53 30 0 1 76 E Inight 20 El FlowSwitls mpg mpg 22 50 260 KB 800 Eng 772 30 025 73 3 HES Lithopaltems 1 E FlewerFl ThougeHD mpg mpg 23 38 063 KB 8n B00 420 30 16 0 5 HES Lilhopattems lt E Folage AndFlowers HD mpg mpg 24 13572KB 1024 768 163 30 L5 5n Cj HES Loges 23 E Gibson GuitarHD mpg mpg 25 106 059 KB 1024 768 1105 24 0 46 4 E HES Hi Res 24 E GraficDI HD mpa mpg 26 45 702
250. phic Object 3 texture including its first two applied Effects 1 4 9 3 Graphic Object 3 texture including its first three applied Effects 10 0 255 Color selected as a look up value from an internal gradient oo N O 0O0 Ko DLHD Digital Light User Manual 17 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Pan and Scan M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 255 This effect Zooms into a still image and then by changing position you can pan across the image horizontally and vertically It only functions on image sizes greater than 1024 x 1024 in at least one direction Modifier 1 Adjusts the horizontal pan position from O left edge to 255 100 right edge of the image The default DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Modifier 2 Adjusts the vertical pan position from 0 bottom edge to 255 100 top edge of the image The default DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Modifier 3 The default DMX value is O no zoom Increasing the value increases the zoom into the image to a maximum at a value of 255 100 The total Zoom range is proportional to the image size Tip Although you can apply this effect in several different modes global graphic and visual the modifier channel adjustments will only function if there is enough room left on the image to move In most cases the first application of this effect will be the only one to have an effect 180 DLHD Digital Lig
251. put has the potential to override the output of the control board To display the warp edited output 1 With the warp editor enabled select the file from the File Name drop down field to view in the editor These files are available for recall from the control desk at a later point 2 To display the selected file on Output 1 select the same file from the drop down list and select force output The image that is being displayed is being affected by the warp grid 3 Make changes as needed to the warp by selecting control points editing and deselecting Note The map is updated when you let go of the mouse button after dragging ie on mouse up 254 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 16 CMA Warp Editor The Checkerboard is a test pattern view that can be selected for in Small Medium or Large format to aid in creating your warp Edit Undo History and Reset View You can Undo and Redo as many steps back J TT go and forward in the editing process according to the number set in the History Size field THEN NER g Apply Clicking the Reset button in Reset View defaults the grid to the original position in the display pane Default Values Clicking the Reset button will default the grid to Default Vah Reset the original rotation and scale values Point Size You can Decrease or Increase the control point Point Size Decrease Increase size on your grid by clic
252. quipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C dic 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling The DLHD has one user serviceable fuse which controls mains voltage to the fixture To replace a fuse l oO Ui Bb UJ Loosen the 2 Phillips head screws on the top Tilt the connector panel away from the box Remove the fuse from the fuse holder Replace the fuse with a 5A slow blow fuse only Disconnect power to the fixture If the fixture has been operating allow the fixture to cool before handling cover of the connector side of the box Replace the side and top panels DLHD Digital Light User Manual 271 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window WARNINGS Disconnect power before servicing Equipment surfaces may reach temperatures up to 130 C 266 F Allow the fixture to cool before handling a E To access the front window 1 Unlatch and remove the front bezel 2 Inside the bezel locate the three Phillips head screws and washers securing the front window in place 3 Remove the three screws with washers that hold the window to the bezel making sure not to misplace the washers 4 Clean the front window using a mild glass cleaner containing no ammonia and a soft lint free cotton cloth 5 If the window needs replacement use the part specified in Related Products and Accessories on page 4 6 Carefully replace t
253. r values cyan shift from 0 maximum to 84 a minimum shift Red and blue color values magenta shift from 85 maximum to 170 a minimum shift Green and blue color values yellow shift from a 171 maximum to 255 a minimum shift Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 24 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 184 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 18 200 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Tiling On Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 48 Tiling varies the number of times a media file is applied as a texture to an object This effect works best on objects that have an undisrupted surface area Modifier 1 Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the x axis A value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0 maximum image magnification Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255 100 maximum Modifier 2 Adjusts the size and number of tiles along the y axis A value of 128 50 no adjustment Values below the midpoint size a single image to 0 maximum image magni fication Values above the midpoint increase number of images displayed to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 Adjusts the spacing between tiles Black spacing between tiles increases from a O a minimum width to 127 a maximum width Transparent spacing between tiles increases from 128 a minimum width to 255 a maximum width NO
254. rameter is set at a value of 255 100 the mask is sized to leave the image 100 visible When Mask Size is set at 0 the mask totally covers the composite image Tip Crossfading the Mask Size parameter can create unique fades to and from video black Mask Select DMX value 0 Mask Size DMX value 255 100 Mask Select value of 0 Mask Select DMX value 1 Mask Size DMX value 128 50 Mask Size DMX value 126 50 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 91 CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Mask Edge Fade The Mask Edge Fade parameter operates differently depending on the value of the Mask Select parameter Default DMX Value 0 no adjustment to mask When the Mask Select parameter value 0 to 127 49 Mask Edge Fade adjusts the amount of fading from a DMX value of O no edge fade to 255 100 maximum edge fade When the Mask Select parameter value 128 50 to 255 100 the strobing masks are selected and Mask Edge Fade adjusts the speed of the strobing from minimum at a DMX value 0 to a maximum strobe speed at a DMX value 255 100 NOTE A Global Effect Mode parameter option lets you define a Mask Edge Fade color see page 80 Original Image Mask applied without Edge Fade Mask with Edge Fade applied 92 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Image Edge Fade Four Image Edge Fade parameters let you control the Edge Fade for individual sides of your object top bottom
255. rease value to maximum at 255 100 COL TT AGA AMBER mers ii B BB EL LIII Modifier 2 In situations where you are projecting from any angle other than perpendicular to the surface you can use the Modifier 2 to adjust the vertical center of the image A DMX value of 128 5096 no adjustment Adjusting toward O moves the vertical center down to the bottom of the image Values above the midrange move the vertical center up to the top of the image at a DMX value of 255 100 Modifier 3 You can use the Modifier 3 parameter to adjust the image s horizontal center when you re projecting onto a sphere an inside or an outside corner A DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Adjusting toward O moves the horizontal center toward the left edge of the image Values above the midrange move the horizontal center right toward the edge of the image at a DMX value of 255 10096 NOTE Modifier 3 is not used when projecting onto an inside or outside cylinder 158 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Digital MSpeed and Digital MSpeed 2 Y Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 103 and 105 In an effort to smooth DMX data for rotation scaling and position values at the Graphic Object level historically a crossfading algorithm has been applied to these values Digital MSpeed allows you to set a crossfade speed to these values to achieve smoother fa
256. remove all your external USB devices Return to Main Menu K 284 DLHD Digital Light User Manual APPENDIX A DLHD Specifications Appendix A DUHD Specifications Fixture mechanical electrical optical and component specifications are listed Mechanical Fixture Dimensions 594mm x 690mm x 950mm 23 4in x 24 8in x 38 4in Weight 63 5 kg 140 Ibs Road Case Dimensions 711mm x 737mm x 1168mm 28in x 29in x 46in Weight Fixture Roadcase 118kg 260 lbs DLHD Digital Light User Manual 285 APPENDIX A DLHD Specifications Electrical WARNING AN Class 1 equipment This equipment must be earthed I nput ratings 100 120V 7 0A maximum 50 60Hz 200 240V 3 5A 50 60Hz Power factor 0 94 Fuse Power supply output fuse 5A 250V slow blow only Lamp 380W NSH Light Output 7000 ANSI lumens Rated Lamp Life 3000 hours Computer Processor INTEL 7 4770 3 4GHZ Memory 8 GB DDR3 RAM Hard drive 256 GB SanDisk solid state drive Video Card AMD Radeon HD7750 SDI Capture Card BlackMagic Decklink SDI HD Operating System Windows 7 embedded Projector Model Sanyo PCL HP7000L Aspect ratio 16 9 native Brightness uniformity 90 Contrast ratio 2700 1 full on full off Vertical Lens Shift 107 Display technology 1 2 TFT Poly x3 Color Control x1 Panel resolution 1920 x 1080 dots Standard Zoom Lens Throw Ratio 1 8 2 4 1 standard Long Zoom Lens Throw Ratio 2 4 4 3 1 optional accessory
257. rent with grayscale not used as alpha White transparent then invert matte color 4 White transparent using a Graphic Object media file content as the matte texture White transparent with grayscale used as alpha 9 White transparent with grayscale not used as alpha Black transparent with matte color controlled by Modifier 3 as lookup in internal color gradient map 1 1 Black transparent with matte color controlled by Modifier 3 as lookup in internal color gradient map and inverted 178 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Modifier 2 The first 20 DMX values are assigned to the following Matte pattern options Modifier 3 This parameter determines the texture for the Matte mode selected with the Modifier 1 parameter Modifier 1 Modifier 3 DMX Value value oO gt lt Z A Not Used Graphic Object 1 texture without applied Effects Graphic Object 1 texture including its first applied Effect Graphic Object 1 texture including its first two applied Effects Graphic Object 1 texture including its first three applied Effects Graphic Object 2 texture without applied Effects Graphic Object 2 texture including its first applied Effect Graphic Object 2 texture including its first two applied Effects Graphic Object 2 texture including its first three applied Effects Graphic Object 3 texture without applied Effects Graphic Object 3 texture including its first applied Effect Gra
258. rotective eyewear Mild glass cleaner containing no ammonia and a soft lint free cotton cloth WARNING AN This fixture must be serviced by qualified personnel The information listed in this chapter is intended to assist qualified personnel only Pan and Tilt Locking The DLHD fixture is equipped with mechanical pan and tilt locking latches to stabilize the fixture for shipping or servicing There is a single pan lock position and three tilt lock positions Tilt Lock Tilt Lock Position Options DLHD Digital Light User Manual 263 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintaining the Filtering System Like all high quality video projection units the DLHD fixture must be kept protected from excessive amounts of glycol fog mineral oil and smoke DLHD fixtures incorporate multiple air filters to reduce these risks to a minimum however the user must follow these guidelines to ensure continued operation of the fixture e Air filters both fixture and projector should be checked and cleaned on a regular basis When used in a closed or fixed environment where fog or haze is used we recommend at least a weekly check Do not situate DLHD in areas of high fog density such as directly in front of a fog machine or mineral oil hazer e Minimize the exposure of DLHD to both glycol fog and mineral oil Filter Warnings The DLHD menu system displays a series of filter status and warnings to alert you
259. rs suggested default values are the midpoint of the 16 bit DMX value range which is equal to no rotation Increasing the DMX value from the midpoint indexes the object in a clockwise direction Reducing the DMX value below the midpoint indexes the object in a counterclockwise direction When the DMX value for a rotation parameter is greater than the 720 limit in either direction the object begins rotating continuously Additional adjustment to the DMX values increases the speed of continuous rotation Counter clockwise Clockwise Indexed Rotation o Indexed Rotation l l Continuous Rotation 720 0 0 0 720 Continuous Rotation Rotation Speed Rotation Speed NOTE Global and Graphic Effects Mode parameters contain a Prerotation Translation effect option When a Global or Graphic Effects Mode DMX value 102 you can use the Effect Modifier parameters to locate the image in a virtual three dimensional space Applying the Rotation parameters then cause the image to orbit around the selected axis from that location see Prerotation Translation on page 185 70 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Rotation Parameters X Rotation The X Rotation parameter rotates the selected Graphic Object around the X axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a vertical flip at variable speeds This parameter lets you view an object from a di
260. s ect Mode Name Description Modifier1 Modifier2 Modifier HS Selected To Transparent makes selected l l i Hue Saturation hue and saturation transparent with the rest of Tolerance l Coordinate Coordinate the image unchanged Texture Shift shifts texture coordinate by color Horizontal Vertical Color value Shift Shift and Scale Lens Grid views texture through grid of lenses Magnification Edge Shading Edge Detect BW2 creates a pencil line drawn Sample Edge Threshold Detected 92 i i effect Distance Comparison Edge Scaler 93 Film Burn Unburn create a burn pattern on the Burn Unburn Film Burn image Rate Blackening Pattern 94 Film Noise creates an aged film effect Noise Rate Ross PA Noise Level add Jitter 95 Particle System 1 converts image to a particle Emitter Trail Particle pattern Type Length Acceleration Particle System 2 adds adjustments to Effect Number of Particle Emitter 95 Particles Size Size 97 Particle System 3 adds adjustments to Effect Initial Particle Particle Particle 95 Effect 96 Velocity Rotation Lifetime l Number Refraction DAVE Gaussian Halo creates blur from clear center Sample Number of Gaussian toward the edges of an image Distance Filter Passes Curve Shape Scale color with Scene Change Detect transparency effect Scale RGB RGB to Alpha alpha applied 101 Yxy Luminance Scaling adjusts brightness Scale Scale X cgale without effecting color Luminance Prerotation Translation places object in 3
261. s installation on your personal computer The following are the recommended software requirements for running the CMA e Windows XP Vista or Windows 7 32 and 64 bit e Microsoft Net 2 100 1000 base Ethernet card a Gigabit Ethernet card is recommended for fast content uploading of large files To automatically install the CMA on your computer s hard drive insert the CD that shipped with your media server NOTE If you are running Windows OS and the CMA doesn t automatically install navigate to the CMA msi file in your windows browser and double click to install the CMA Once the CMA is installed double clicking on the application icon will launch it and display the CMA Client Window Launching the CMA on Axon Axon media servers can launch the CMA locally When you start Axon the local monitor will display a desktop that gives you access to the CMA 210 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Press the Launch CMA button on the local desktop The application automatically finds and identifies the Local Drives including any connected USB drives the CD DVD drive as well as other Axon HD Axon DL 3 and DL 2 media servers connected to the same Ethernet network NOTE The AxonHD server supports an onboard DVD drive you can use for copying content into an Axon HD Server as well as burning User content onto DVD CD Auto Discovery When a DL 3 DL 2 fixture an Axon or AxonHD medi
262. s parameter lets you view an object from a different angle by turning the object You can also view an object from a different angle by changing the viewpoint in space for the composite image see Global Viewpoint Mode on page 130 Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object around another Original Object 1 and Object 2 Z axis Rotation Applied to Object 2 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 73 CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Scaling the Object You can scale an Graphic Object along the X Y and or Z axis to adjust the object size The Scale parameter adjusts the size of the object s image up to approximately 10x its original size At a DMX value of zero the image shrinks to a dot At the midpoint of the DMX value range the image is normal size When the DMX value is increased from the midpoint the image is enlarged In addition when the DMX value is reduced below the midpoint an inverted image is enlarged Tip Use the X Y and Z Scale parameters together to enlarge or shrink a 3 D object proportionally X Scale The X Scale parameter uses two channels to scale the selected 3 D object along the X axis either expanding it or making it smaller Use it when you want to size the object s horizontal component A DMX value of 32768 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the object horizontally to the smallest at O Values greater then 50 enlarge the object horizon
263. s the texture and Subpicture Subpicture Subpicture overlays it on the original center on Xaxis center on Y axis size Magnifying Lens creates a virtual convex lens Lens center Lens center l i Lens size that magnifies a portion of the texture on X axis on Y axis Magnifying Lens 2 creates a virtual double convex lens that magnifies a portion of the 34 35 36 Len nter Lens center ens cente E Lens size on X axis on Y axis texture 38 Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Reduces Color Enhances Edge detection picture elements Contrast sensitivity 908 N 56 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 8 Graphic Functions Moves Green Moves Blue component component own and right down and left Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Not Used Not Used RGB Swap to BGR redefines component color Red to Blue Blue to Red RGB Swap to RBG redefines component color Red Green to Blue Blue to Green RGB Swap to GRB redefines component color Red to Green Green to Red 44 Colorize Gray Scale maps pixel intensity to Selects Color Selects zero Controls color Scheme intensity point fading 45 Intensity Key turns pixels of selected intensity Selects Color Sets Intensity Controls transparent Scheme bandwidth Transparency AG Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a liquid Controls size Seeds random Controls surface speed generator raindrop rate a T l l Space 48 Tiling On multiplies i
264. screen s the mechanical iris closed If so check the setting for the Dimmer parameter see Dimmer on page 45 Did you recently change inputs About 10 seconds are required for an input change to take effect However you might have selected an invalid input using projector controls Try setting the projector back its defaults see Reset Screen on page 36 Or use DMX to exit the projector menu system see Projector Control on page 47 Powers on but no image Make sure a video input is physically attached to the input you selected and that the video feed is active This occurs when the iris plate is in the wrong position for the installed lens and lens shift is not engaged Standard Accessory Wide Angle and Accessory Ultra Long Throw lenses use one position The Accessory Long Throw lens use another see Adjusting the Iris Plate for the Accessory Long Zoom lens on page 269 Image appears clipped off at the bottom Check the Fixture filters see page 265 s the DLHD mounted less than 1 4 meters to an object If so move the DLHD farther away to enable it to focus properly Make sure the DLHD is not operating near fog machines hazers or mineral oil hazers see Clean the front window see Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window on page 272 Image is blurry out of focus or colors are unnatural Check the lamp see the projector manual shipped with the DLHD e f you re using the projector s o
265. segment of a video loop including Scrub capability Four Graphic Effect Mode channels provide multiple color mixing and visual effects Variable Opacity to allow for crossfading or dissolves between media streams Full control of image Rotation Positioning and Scaling on X Y and Z axes Black Level and Contrast control to optimize content obal parameters provide graphic controls to the composite image created by up to nine media streams Collage Generator technology configures multiple media server outputs to display a single image in arrays up to 16 horizontal x 8 vertical Curved Surface Support corrects for shape distortions that occur when you project onto surfaces that aren t flat Intensity overlays the opacity control to provide system wide intensity level Overall image Color Mixing applied to composite media stream image Three Global Effect Mode channels provide multiple effects that can be applied to the composite image Multiple Mask selections with edge fading and strobe effects Edge fading for creating montages Keystone correction of output projection Digital Framing Shutters Multiple modes are available for synchronizing content playback on multiple media servers linked through an Ethernet network DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 1 Product Overview Content Management Application Available for Windows operating systems Communicates with other DLHD DL 3 DL 3F DL 2 Axon HD and Axon media servers over
266. sepia shades at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value O to full saturation at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Not Used 4 2 e o Original Content Modifier1 parameter DMX value 255 Modifier1 parameter DMX value 190 Modifier2 parameter DMX value 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 135 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Push to Red M Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode Parameter DMX value 107 This option reduces colors in the selected image to all Red values Modifier 1 Fades from original color at a DMX value O to a range of red tones at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Adjusts color saturation from no adjustment at a DMX value O to full saturation at a value of 255 100 Modifier 3 Not Used Original Content Modifier1 parameter DMX value 255 Modifier1 parameter DMX value 190 Modifier2 parameter DMX value 255 136 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Add All Pixels M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 4 This effect adds color to all pixels including black using the RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases red color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Increases blue color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 10096 2 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3
267. ser Manual CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration DMX Control Setup Patching the DL 3 Fixture to a Wholehog Console Wholehog console library systems patch the DL 3 fixture as three to eleven fixture types When using Wholehog software add one motion one global and multiple graphic fixtures for each complete DL 3 unit in the Fixture Schedule or Add Fixtures wind DL 3 1 with user number 1 motion 2 global and 3 to 11 graphic fixture types Viewing Output To output an image from a DL 3 fixture 1 Open the Dimmer on the motion fixture and set the Global Intensity parameter to full 2 Set the Object Opacity parameter for the selected object to full When programming with Wholehog software the Media Folder and Object parameters default to 1 so choosing any Media File value between 1 and 37 displays a media loop from the HES Core folder Media Folder 1 on a flat 4x3 rectangle Object 1 The Dimmer Global Intensity and Object Opacity parameters all need values greater than zero for an image to be visible NOTE If you have trouble viewing output and you are not using a lighting console from High End Systems check that the library for your desk has the correct default settings for all DMX channels Shutting Down the Fixture Recommended Shutdown Options There are two recommended ways to shutdown the fixture 1 A DMX controller can shut down the fixture s motion controls and projector remotely with the shutdown
268. ser Manual 143 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swap to GBR M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 7 This effect allows you to swap colors All red values become green all green values become blue and all blue values become red Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 100 green Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to blue from 0 no color change to 255 100 blue Modifier 3 Transitions blue color component to red from O no color change to 255 100 red Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 192 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 144 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swap to GRB Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 43 This effect allows you to swap colors All red values become green and all green values become blue Blue values are unaffected Modifier 1 Transitions red color component to green from 0 no color change to 255 10096 green Modifier 2 Transitions green color component to red from O no color change to 255 10096 blue Modifier 3 No change to blue color component Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 192 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 145 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions RGB Swa
269. servers however as this can cause problems with playback DLHD Digital Light User Manual 207 CHAPTER 14 Synchronizing Content 208 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Chapter I5 Content Management Application CMA A Content Management Application CMA running on an Axon HD media server or a computer connected through an Ethernet network gives you remote control of content software and configuration management functions The CMA software that shipped on removable media with your Axon HD media server is used to e Upload and download custom digital content to digital light fixtures e Configure units to use in a DMX environment Edit warping of output for display on diverse surfaces Update software for multiple units The CMA can access all media servers connected to the same Ethernet network DMX Universe 1 DMX Universe 2 Optional Road Hog Fullboar Console NOTE lf you are using a DMX console and other automated lighting products compatible with Art Net this network can also serve as the link for DMX control DLHD Digital Light User Manual 209 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Ins tallina tne CMA on Your Cc mputer You can download the latest version of the application from the Digital Lighting support section of the High End Systems website A download wizard simplifie
270. sity from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 full red and blue opacity intensity Modifier 3 Increases the blue component opacity or intensity from O no adjustment to 255 100 full red and green opacity intensity Object 1 Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 145 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 215 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 15 116 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Color to B W M Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 111 Begins with a white screen and fades to the original image in black and white All color is converted Modifier 1 Transitions the image from full white at a DMX value of O to black and white at a value of 128 50 Increasing values above 50 reveals more of the image in black and white to complete at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Modifier 3 Not Used DotP and Resample Y Object Effect MGlobal Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 13 This effect applies an algorithm that pixelates and solarizes the image It also makes the surface of some 3D objects appear reflective Modifiers 1 Modifier 2 and Modifier 3 parameters work together to adjust the algorithm Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 170 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 64 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 168 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 117 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Edge Detect Black and White W Object Effect
271. ssssssssssese nne nnn 22 LCD Display POWer BUON siria 22 LCD Display Menu Options and Selection sessssse ran 22 Navigating the Men aia ala EE MEE UE 23 M nu ODIOS ai EUREN 24 Menu Screen Descriptions nic Ea 28 DMA Ta cm 28 DMX Control Scope Ra 28 DMX Protocol TaD xeucdidtdoosset toda OO AA a a CR be d a cott 29 DMX Protocol Global SCENE ai 29 DMX Protocol OD SCl eens cr RA OA A TN 29 DIM RcRcIOR MP T TETTE 30 SET TETTE 31 SELL ubquoit ocisc Mr erm 31 Set Projector cree qdo MEER UE 32 Sel NO SCE apta 33 X DLHD Digital Light User Manual A A A A AO 33 MO Ta A AN D P AAA NE ALAS C P AG 34 A er 34 nto Versi n S Ch SIN sausdaqagudsitenagdid uto i arin pli teat dp He ud ov D bb ard o vetus 34 Into Status Tab ria 35 Into Hargware Tab asppsstouctp tud bibi ape ERI REPE pas 35 TESE TaD dE m M m 36 Test HOMES CESEN roire eiee ue epa m E PE Ure dee udi nd dtebulbetdbr s C rues 36 Test selt Tesr Screen das 36 RESEE Creen e eter Mr 36 Chapter 4 SDI Live Video Input and Control The graphics engine in a DLHD fixture can receive SDI video from an external Source Connecting Live VIdGeO 2 5 vius ARM DAvERARENE EFIE A a ae 37 Configuring the SDI Video Input Source eeee nennen nnn nnne 37 Displaying LIve Vide 555 oan bots petuo Dipl PARA OU ctn oben uides 38 Chapter 5 DMX Programming Basics and Quick Start If you are new to DMX programing this chapter gives you a brief ov
272. sts the respective y corner positions vertically toward the center of that edge of the image Keystone Top Left X DMX value 85 Keystone Top Left Y DMX value 128 Keystone Top Left Y DMX value 85 Keystone Top Right X DMX value 0 Keystone Top Right X DMX value 85 Keystone Bottom Left X DMX value 239 Keystone Top Right Y DMX value 85 Keystone Bottom Left X DMX value 0 Other Keystone parameter DMX values 255 Keystone Bottom Right Y DMX value 2 Other Keystone parameter DMX values 255 NOTE DL 3 fixtures have vertical lens shift capability that provides additional keystone control Engage lens shift with your DMX console in the Control Parameter of the Motion Control fixture type 94 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 11 Global Functions Keystone X Ratio The Keystone X Ratio Parameter shapes the output to adjust for keystone effects created in certain output situations This parameter adjusts the output by compressing or expanding the image horizontally Default DMX Value 128 50 no adjustment DMX value settings below the midpoint of the range compress the image horizontally from maximum compression at a value of 0 to no compression at a value of 128 DMX value settings above the midpoint of the range expand the image horizontally from 128 no expansion to 255 100 maximum expansion Original media file X Ratio DMX value 255 100 Keystone Y Ratio The Keystone Y Ratio parameter shapes the
273. symbols appear in margins throughout this manual to highlight messages CAUTION This symbol appears adjacent to Caution messages Not heeding these messages could result in personal injury and or damage to equipment WARNING This symbol appears adjacent to high voltage warning messages Not heeding these messages could result in serious personal injury Packaged Media Notice Any use of this product other than consumer personal use in any manner that complies with the MPEG 2 Standard for encoding video information for packaged media is expressly prohibited without a license under applicable patents in the MPEG 2 patent portfolio which license is available from MPEG LA L L C 250 Steele Street Suite 300 Denver Colorado 80206 Warranty Information Limited Warranty Unless otherwise stated your product excluding the lamp is covered by a one year parts and labor limited warranty The lamp warranty for Christie projectors is 120 days or 500 hours whatever comes first It is the owner s responsibility to furnish receipts or invoices for verification of purchase date and dealer or distributor If purchase date cannot be provided date of manufacture will be used to determine warranty period Returning an Item Under Warranty for Repair It is necessary to obtain a Return Material Authorization RMA number from your dealer or point of purchase BEFORE any units are returned for repair The manufacturer will make the final determination
274. t M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 40 This effect duplicates the image vertically and mirrors the image alongside its original Modifier 1 The default DMX value of 128 50 sets the center point of the edge where the duplicate images meet at the center of the screen Values below the midpoint move the center point toward the left as you approach 0 Values above the midpoint move the center point toward the right as you approach 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Original Content Modifier 3 Not Used Effect Mode parameter DMX 40 Effect Mode parameter DMX 40 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 134 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 173 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Image Scale and Rotate Y Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 52 This effect lets you scale and rotate the media file texture applied to a 3 D object s surface independent of Graphic Object rotation you set with the Rotation parameters see Rotating a 3 D Object on page 69 This allows scaling and rotating outside the bounds of the 3D object Modifier 1 Scales the texture The default DMX value of 0 no adjustment As you increase the DMX value to 255 10096 the single image scales to an increasing number of multiple images similar to tiling Modifier 2 Sets the texture rotation angle A DMX value of 128 5096 2 no adjustment Values above the midpoint rotate clockwise 255
275. t User Manual Chapter l6 CMA Warp Editor User Warps are applied globally to modify the output display shape This chapter describes the Warp Editor and includes a step by step example for creating a custom warp graphic object Overview The Warp Editor feature lets you adjust Axon HD Axon HD Pro and DLHD output to match complex projection surfaces These forms allow the projection to match irregular surfaces or quickly produce interesting creative results The warp editor can also edit geometry directly either to create complex holes in surfaces or generate new polygons based on neighboring geometry You can build a geometrical warp in one of two ways 1 You can modify one of the primitive shapes provided in the editor Simple surfaces such as fabric screens can be quickly built from these primitives This concept can extend to more complicated forms such as rectangular grids with sections cut out cylindrical surfaces and spherical surfaces 2 You can import and edit an obj file you have created through another application Functional Operation The warp is applied at the global level analogous to a keystone operation Editing the output at the final step retains all layer programming but allows changes to the image as a whole Consequently there is no need to perform major changes of the layer positions if the projector has moved This also applies to changing the projection surface If one projector is being used on a flat
276. tally to the largest at 65535 100 Default DMX Value 32768 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 X Scale DMX value 165 All Scale DMX values 32768 50 Scaled 3 times in X direction Y Scale The Y Scale parameter uses two channels to scale the selected 3 D object along the Y axis either expanding it or making it smaller Use it when you want to size the object s vertical component 74 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale A DMX value of 32768 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the object vertically to the smallest at 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object vertically to the largest at 65535 100 Default DMX Value 32768 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Y Scale parameter DMX value 165 All Scale DMX values 32768 50 Scaled 3 times in Y direction The Z Scale parameter uses two channels to scale the selected 3 D object along the Z axis either expanding or shrinking it Use it when you want to size the object s thickness A DMX value of 32768 50 sets the object at its normal size Values less than 50 shrink the the object thickness until it reaches a point at a value of 0 Values greater then 50 enlarge the object to a maximum thickness at 65535 100 Default DMX Value 32768 50 Normal Scale Original Object 1 and Object 2 Object 2 Z Scale parameter DMX
277. tation Of Value Function Range 1 24 Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Y axis fast to slow 95 Continuous rotation stop 26 49 Rotates the image counterclockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees 50 0 rotation around Y axis 51 74 Rotates the image clockwise around Y axis in steps to 720 degrees absolute 75 Continuous rotation stop 76 100 Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Y axis slow to fast Tip Using this parameter you can turn one object through another Original Object 1 and Object 2 Y axis rotation applied to Object 2 Z Rotation The Z Rotation parameter rotates or indexes the selected Graphic Object around the Z axis with 16 bit precision You can index the rotation or set a continuous rotation creating a circular spin at variable speeds 72 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 10 Graphic Functions Rotation Position Scale Default DMX Value 32768 50 No Z Rotation of Value Range 1 24 25 26 49 50 51 74 75 76 100 Function Continuous variable speed counterclockwise image rotation around Z axis fast to slow Continuous rotation stop Rotates the image counterclockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees 0 rotation around Z axis Rotates the image clockwise around Z axis in steps to 720 degrees Continuous rotation stop Continuous variable speed clockwise image rotation around Z axis slow to fast Thi
278. tent in a recovery situation NOTE You can obtain a copy of the Factory Content from High End Systems customer service 36 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 4 SDI Live Video Input and Control The graphics engine in a DLHD fixture can receive SDI video from an external source A DLHD fixture can project other live video sources connected to the fixture s SDI input ports Live SDI input can then be enhanced and manipulated by the graphics engine NOTE You can configure the graphics engine to capture video from an external source or the internal camera but not from both at the same time Connecting Live Video The DLHD fixture has video connectors for SDI on its rear panel as shown in the following figure SDI Output SDI Input RECEIVE Q B1 T TRANSMIT O 100 120 V USB 2 50 60Hz 7A 200 240 V 50 60Hz 3 5 A 5 C Configuring the SDI Video Input Source SDI SDI OUT IN ETHERNET SDI capture is another option for input and output to the graphics engine NTSC and PAL formats are available for Standard Definition SDI capture There is no support for SECAM High Definition SDI capture accepts the following formats opis 1080 23 97PSF NOTE A reboot is not required to change the SDI format selection Changes to the SDI format take place instantly on the DLHD fixture DLHD Digital Light User Manual 37 CHAPTER 4 SDI Live Video Input and Control Displaying Live Video When Media F
279. ter eeseeessssssssee emen 265 Replacing the Fixture Filter iaa a 265 Replacing th Lamina a E A A 267 Removing the Profector cima AA A 268 Replacing the Lens siii wes iwewisesdewearewanwewwanees 269 Replacing the FUSE ii aras 271 Cleaning or Replacing the Front Window e eee nennen nnn nnne 272 Replacing Motor Driver Boards o nseeee essaie nnn annnm nna nnns 273 Fixt re Head DriverdBogdlIr cuesssasuniit etuesaquao ora capat bna e cuu enced eis 273 Replacing Fixture Base Driver Board ssssssssssee meme nns 274 Troubl shootlnd iioii vas FuRisapesaDEANN MD EE M NR a 275 Button Shortcut COMMIS ario atio Papel ten uer dtc cte PER ped edel toc rac eaa eee 275 Status Message Menu Display al ooo REN AME 275 PUTON ACL OM PAE PCC PE uu eRP tendebat rane edt iu ute Mrs mE duode 276 Mars enis E Nl T Nal 276 Supported Error Warning Messages cece cece eee e tees nan rn cnn nn nr nnn n 276 System State LEDS ada 217 Board LED States aii aid 277 General Troubleshooting Suggestions ecccccce cece eee ee eee cece eeeeeeeee emen 278 Frequently Asked Questions ccc cccccc cece e cece eee eee cra narrar 280 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter 18 Restoring the System You can perform a system restore on a DL 3 Axon or DL 2 Server with your System Restore CD Hardware Requirements siii a n 281 Performing the System Restore c 0mmcccccconn
280. ter DMX value 98 This effect imitates looking at the image through a prism that you define with the Modifier parameters Modifier 1 Sets the number of facets A DMX value of 0 no facets The number of facets increase from 10 three facets to 255 100 maximum 16 facets Modifier 2 Sets the refraction index from 0 minimum to 255 maximum Modifier 3 Rotates the prism The default value is 128 50 Values below the midpoint rotate clockwise from O fastest to 127 slowest rotation Values above the midpoint rotate counterclockwise from 129 fastest to 255 slowest rotation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 255 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 107 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 155 188 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Raindrop Y Object Effect Global Effect Effects Mode parameter DMX value 46 This effect simulates a raindrop distortion on a surface Modifier 1 Controls the drop size from 0 no drop to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Sets the random number generator seed number This lets you create a repeatable random sequence that will synchronize correctly when using the Collage Generator effect see page 157 Modifier 3 Adjusts the raindrop creation rate from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Original Content Modifier parameter 1 DMX value 255 Modifier parameter 2 DMX value 255 Modifier parameter 3 DMX value 185 DLHD
281. the Dismiss button to Finished 5erors and 6 warnings found See below for details continue working with CMA File Path Desenpti D CADocuments and Seth missing MPEG 2 sequence L L Documents and Setti sequence extensions out o A CAD ecuments and Setti sequence end code missing A CA Documents and Setti movie not I frame only 224 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA The files with errors in a group of files will not be copied on to the server Files with warnings will be copied They will show up highlighted in yellow when viewed in the Details view in the CMA to indicate to the user that this file is problematic High End Systems Content Management Application File Media Files Help HIGH END SYSTEMS E489 Al Servers B servers Nam Type DMX Size Widh Height Frar A EPA DL3 One 1 E 0012_indianboatman mpg 158 894 KB H C User Media E O01 3choruscars mpg mpg E O User Objects E 0014 sola rallerderby mpg Stock mete f 0015 sola roller2 mpa C Stock Objects E 0016_breakcarcliff mpg DL 3 Two 2 a Uer Medi E OD26_solo_a mpg 15 436 KB 22 897 KB fe 480 13 013 KB F2D 480 11 266 KB F2D 480 14 842 KB 720 480 51 806 KB F2D 480 36 816 KB F2D 480 41 270 KB 720 480 61 506 KB F2D 480 2 615 KB 720 480 Y 22 KB F2D 480 71 860 KB F2D 480 27 349 KB F2D 480 12 395 KB F2D 480 24 561 KB F2D 480 21 626 KB F2D 480 Content 40
282. the lens 3 Slide the light block sheet upward and remove it 4 Hold the lens with one hand and pull the Lens latch upward with the other hand 5 Remove the lens from the projector 6 Fit the new lens to the projector Make sure that the lens is fully inserted to the projector to re engage the latch Adjusting the I ris Plate for the Accessory Long Zoom lens If you are installing the Accessory Long Throw 2 4 4 3 1 zoom lens you will need to adjust the Iris plate to accommodate the additional length it adds 7 Loosen the four captive screws that hold the front bezel to the unit 8 Slowly drop the bezel away from the fixture and detach the IR illuminator wire 9 Remove the four screws two ma 3 on the top and two on the i bottom holding the iris plate to the frame 10 Slide the plate forward and reinsert the screws in the Accessory position DLHD Digital Light User Manual 269 CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Reinstalling the projector into DLHD fixture 1 2 3 Push the Lens Lock Lever downward Make sure that the lens is properly locked Replace the light block sheet and the projector cover Keeping the DLHD fixture head tilt locked at 90 horizontal feed the Zoom Focus wires through the front of the projector Slide the projector lens first feet down back into the DLHD fixture head Once fully inside the head of the fixture pull excess slack from the Zoom a
283. tifies content by source Preloaded Stock Content A large library of Stock Media and Stock Objects ships on every AxonHD and AxonHD Pro media server and will also be provided through upgrades from High End Systems This content is read only You won t be able to download edit the DMX values or remove these files from the fixture E 4 All Servers 3 servers File Count Date E 92902AAA 0 S HES_Core_HD_1080p 1 12 14 2013 10 10 14 AN E MI A3904178 0 A Luna Blue 2 E 12 14 2013 10 05 20 AN EM AxonHDProTG 100 9 Art_Beats 3 13 12 14 2013 10 04 15 AN H E User Media Beacon 4 22 12 14 2013 10 05 51 AN j A User Objects O FeedBack_Video 5 29 12 14 2013 10 06 31 AN i3 User Warps O Kristine_Schomaker 6 23 12 14 2013 10 11 35 AN 2 Stock Media O Rabit_Hole_Creative 7 20 12 14 2013 10 11 56 AN j ud Stock Objects Showfootage 8 28 12 14 2013 10 12 25 AN E All Configuration William_Strother 9 35 12 14 2013 10 13 36 AN FeedBack Video Doors Curtains 10 10 12 14 2013 10 06 51 AN O FeedBack Video Marriage 11 52 12 14 2013 10 07 35 AN O FeedBack Video Religious 12 32 12 14 2013 10 08 08 AN HES Core 13 39 12 14 2013 10 08 55 AN ILJ HES Digital Aerials 1 14 108 12 14 2013 10 10 30 AN JHES Oils 15 14 12 14 2013 10 11 14 AN 214 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA Custom User Content You can create your own custom User Media User Objects and User Warps and upload them to media serv
284. tings and provide drop down boxes numeric up down selectors and other user interface options to select in editable fields UCD Display Adjustment Buttons Display bb L Art Net 1 A display LED and four display adjustment buttons are Version v2 located next to the Display screen The Display LED is LCD Power o Layers Wi C green whenever the Menu Display is on even if it is Menu E x Fixture I j dimmed to video black LCD Display adjustment buttons K AN 1 enu control and provide visual adjustments for the menu display Display Adjustment Buttons NOTE These adjustments are not available for some display models UCD Display Power Button The button nearest the green LED is the LCD Power button Holding it down for two seconds turns the Menu display on or off Use this in situations when you need to turn the Menu display completely off instead of dimming it to video black If you turn the LCD screen off and then remove power to the Digital Light the LCD Power will restore the default ON when you reapply power to the fixture NOTE The LCD Power button doesn t affect power to the fixture or the internal projector UCD Display Menu Options and Selection The button farthest from the Display LED is the Menu button Pressing this brings up the different functions contained in the LCD screen itself The screen menu options are Picture adjusts the sharpness of the screen Color adjusts the richness of the color Co
285. tion for DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures see MSpeed Motor Speed on page 46 To control Pan and Tilt movement timing via a DMX controller crossfading leave the Pan Tilt MSpeed in its default Off setting NOTE DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures use optical encoders for pan and tilt to instantly correct the fixture s position if the fixture is jarred from its programmed position If a physical obstruction prevents the fixture from correcting its position this correction feature times out to prevent wear on the motors If the fixture s position correction has timed out remove the obstruction and home the fixture to return it to normal operation Dimmer DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures have a mechanical iris located in front of the projector output lens that functions as a dimmer for the fixture s output This feature gives the operator the ability to fully shutter the output and eliminate the residual luminance from video black The Dimmer parameter controls the dimming iris adjustment from closed DMX value 0 to fully open DMX value 255 Focus The Focus parameter controls the fixture s mechanical focus from near DMX value 0 to far DMX value 255 Zoom This Zoom parameter controls the fixture s mechanical zoom from narrow DMX value 0 to wide DMX value 255 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 45 CHAPTER 6 Fixture Motion Functions MSpeed Motor Speed The MSpeed parameter adjusts the time required for a motor to complete
286. tition of the drive but should only be done as part of a specified upgrade plan In that case the XPe image the fixture shipped with will need to be updated All system restore operations require the System Restore CD that ships with each media server If you have misplaced or damaged this CD you may contact High End Systems http www highend com for a replacement For a system restore you will also need External USB CD drive for DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures only USB keyboard Optional USB mouse which may require the addition of a USB hub for DL 2 fixtures Performing the System Restore Use the following steps to perform a system restore l Plug your USB CD or DVD drive keyboard and mouse optional into one of the external USB ports on the media server On DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures you may need to use a USB hub although this should only be a requirement if you wish to use a mouse 2 Power on or reboot the media server The System Restore menu will display on the Axon monitor or the Menu Screen on DL 3 and DL 2 fixtures 3 When the fixture boots and the High End Systems logo is seen press F8 Asus or F10 Intel to enter the boot menu for the respective motherboard 4 Select the appropriate boot device and when you see Hit any key to boot from CD press a key on your keyboard DLHD Digital Light User Manual 281 CHAPTER 18 Restoring the System 5 Allow the System Restore menu to load Depending on the s
287. to Yellow gradient creating a fiery effect Modifier 1 Maps the image color values from no adjustment at a value of O to all red to yellow tones at a value of 255 100 Modifier 2 Not Used Modifier 3 Not Used Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX value 255 100 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 123 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Glow M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 73 Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media texture on it You can apply this effect to any 3 D object no matter which media file texture is applied to it This parameter provides an option to view a 3 D object without displaying the associated texture Modifier 1 ncreases red color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 ncreases blue color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Modifier 3 Increases green color component from a DMX value of 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum green saturation Original Content Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 221 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 168 124 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Glou Color Cycle Y Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 74 Glow colorizes and creates a glow on the 3 D object separate from the media t
288. ts The second object can be a solid black screen Media Folder 1 Media File 1 2 Use Modifier 1 to select the Graphic Object you want to display with a trail effect 3 Set Modifier 2 to a DMX Value 2 4 Set Modifier 3 in a range between a DMX value of 240 254 The closer to 254 the more exaggerated the trail effect appears If Modifier 3 is set to 255 the output will appear to stall or freeze on an image Effect Mode parameter DMX 51 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 1 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 128 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 197 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Texture Ripple Asymmetrical Circular Y Object Effect M Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 25 This effect varies the distance of reference points to the applied media file texture around the Z axis without affecting the underlying object to create an effect of wavy ripples moving out from the object s center Modifier 1 Adjusts the size amplitude of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum size Modifier 2 Adjusts the rate frequency of the ripple from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum rate Modifier 3 Adjusts the offset phase speed and direction A DMX value of 128 50 no adjustment DMX Values above the midpoint increase speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest soeed DMX values below the midpoint increase speed in a backward direction from no adjustm
289. turation Transparent Color Coarse Effect Mode parameter DMX value 28 The Transparent Color Coarse parameter selects a color range 40 either side of the defined value Transparent Color Fine Effect Mode parameter DMX value 26 The Transparent Color Fine parameter selects a color range 15 either side of the defined value Transparent Color Medium Effect Mode parameter DMX value 27 The Transparent Color Medium parameter selects a color range 25 either side of the defined value 150 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions Transparent Color Invert Y Object Effect V Global Effect These effects remove a color or small color range from one graphic image to reveal another behind it The removed color becomes transparent The modifier parameters define the color you want to select as the transparent color in terms of Red Green and Blue values An Inverted Transparent Color effect selects a color range either side of the defined value and then sets every other color as transparent Modifier 1 Defines the red color component from O no red to 255 10096 2 maximum red saturation Modifier 2 Defines the green color component from 0 no green to 255 10096 maximum green saturation Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component from 0 no blue to 255 100 maximum blue saturation Transparent Color Invert Coarse Effect Mode parameter DMX value 31 The Transparent
290. ture on X axis on Y axis Magnifying Lens 2 creates a virtual double Lens geni r Lens center convex lens that magnifies a portion of the a Veis Lens size texture Cartoon Edge creates variable outline around Enhances Edge detection 38 Reduces Color ia picture elements Contrast sensitivity Color DeConverge separates and offsets Moves Green Moves Blue image color components from original position down and right down and left Horizontal Mirror creates a mirror effect Not Used Not Used mirror center EN RGB Swap to BGR redefines component color Red to Blue to Blue Green Blue to Red to Red RGB Swap to RBG redefines component color E Green to Blue Blue to EL 48 HGB RGB Swap to GRB redefines component color to GRB redefines component color Red to Red to Green Green to Red to Red Bue E Scale maps pixel intensity to Selects Zero EL color Scheme intensity point fading Intensity Key turns pixels of selected intensity Selects Color Sets Intensity Controls 45 transparent Scheme bandwidth Transparency 46 Raindrop simulates raindrops falling on a liquid Controls size Seeds random Controls surface generator raindrop rate Lr RGB Scale varies the color values Scale varies the color values Green Bue Ed Ad multiplies image mapped to a EN Bonzomaps Vertical 4 m grid between tiles Color to Alpha varies the transparency level of Red to Redio alpha Green to alpha Blue to alpha
291. u align the assembly properly when inserting damage to the fixture can result from improper alignment x Z Select Calibrate Motors in the Test Home Motion All _Home HE menu screen and leave the fixture Calibrate Motors Run El undisturbed for 10 minutes while the M dd calibration process completes A E E ma come e 274 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 17 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section discusses troubleshooting LED states and general troubleshooting suggestions Button Shortcut Commands DLHD fixtures have button commands available for controlling and overriding functionality when you are troubleshooting your fixture Holding the Menu Enter buttons for more than two seconds disables motion system Motors are still energized so unit can be pointed for trouble shooting To Exit this mode press the Menu Enter buttons again for two seconds or send a Global Reset command e Holding down the middle two menu Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds initiates a Global Reset of the motion hardware and homes the unit e Holding down the second from the top and second from the bottom Tab Select buttons for more than two seconds opens the iris when the fixture software is not running to allow navigation for content upgrades and motion uploads To Exit this mode press the same button combination again for more than two seconds NW y Press at the same N t
292. ue has been chosen to give a 9 overlap this starting value is adjustable based on your specific installation 102 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 12 Global Functions Collage Generator Collage Setup Example The new Axon HD offers multiple types of blending and this example focuses on building a standard 2x2 collage using four Axon HD media servers and a lighting console based on Hog 4 software Setup the Collage effect 1 Select the same content on four media servers NOTE Any parameter adjustment to a graphic object must be set on ALL graphic objects that are a part of the Collage For example if you are configuring Graphic Object 1 on four media servers to project as a Collage and want to apply a color effect that effect must be manipulated on Graphic Object 1 of all four media servers 2 Set the Collage Type parameter on the Global Layer to Standard Collage DMX 1 3 In the Alignment Control parameter on the Global Layer show the collage selection grid by selecting the Grid Cell Selection option DMX 6 4 In the Collage Config Selection parameter select 2x2 DMX 3 on all four Axon HD servers 5 Select and assign each individual Axon HD media server its unique section of the collage using the Collage Cell Selection parameter on the Global Layer 6 Show the alignment grid by selecting the Pattern Normal Blend DMX 3 option in the Alignment Control parameter on the Global Layer 7 Use the Edge B
293. upload move and clone content files configure fixtures and upgrade software It also provides tools for resource monitoring and the capability for downloading log files to assist customer service in diagnosing any software issues that may arise Features System e 7000 ANSI lumens output e 2200 1 Contrast Ratio creates exceptional video black e HD SDI connection e Accessory Long Throw 2 4 4 3 1 Ultra Long Throw 4 3 6 1 and Wide Angle 1 3 1 8 1 Zoom lenses are available to maximize fixture positioning options Vertical lens shift capability reduces pixel loss due to keystone correction A royalty free stock digital art collection features more than 1 700 lighting optimized files DLHD Digital Light User Manual 1 CHAPTER 1 Product Overview DL 3 software utilizes Windows 7 Embedded and DirectX technology Powerful Content Management and Configuration software can remotely manage multiple DLHD DL 3 and all Axon media servers over an Ethernet network Allows importing of custom content including 3D objects media files still images DMX512 or Art Net options for DMX console connection Provides remote software upgrade capability Graphics Engine Supports simultaneous playback of up to nine discrete media streams on separate 2D 3D objects Object parameters give you graphic controls for each individual media stream including GI A choice of multiple play modes and play speeds The ability to define any
294. verything else gray Modifier 1 Adjusts the Hue color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum hue Modifier 2 Adjusts the Saturation color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum saturation Modifier 3 Adjusts the color tolerance from 0 l Effect Mode parameter 87 minimum to 255 100 maximum Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 parameter DMX 222 128 DLHD Digital Light User Manual CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions HS Selected to Transparent Effect Mode parameter DMX value 89 Maps a selected color coordinate to a HSI color space and turns it transparent and shows graphic objects behind it Everything else is unchanged Modifier 1 Adjusts the Hue color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum hue Modifier 2 Adjusts the Saturation color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum saturation Effect Mode Parameter 89 Modifier 1 parameter DMX 0 Modifier 3 Adjusts the color tolerance from 0 Modifier 2 parameter DMX 38 minimum to 255 100 maximum Modifier 3 parameter DMX 255 HS to Transparent Effect Mode parameter DMX value 88 Maps a selected color coordinate to a HSI color Space and turns everything else transparent and shows graphic objects behind it Modifier 1 Adjusts the Hue color component from O no adjustment to 255 100 maximum hue Mod
295. w lets you view the fixture software version on all DLHD DL 3 and Axon media servers linked to it via Ethernet High End Systems Content Management Application E E Bl xj File Servers Help HIGH END SYSTEMS E Al Servers 9 servers EB DLHDOne 1 Bi DLHDOne 169 254 153 131 2 0 0 2420 DL3 HGS User Media B DL 3 Two 169 254 11 144 2 0 0 2420 DL3 E User Objects B DL 3 Three 169 254 112 58 2 0 0 2420 DL3 B E Stock Media B DL2 Four 169 254 123 190 20 0 2420 DL2 bp apes a B DL 3 Five 169 254 60 53 2 0 0 2420 DL3 I fes reda MW10 Axon One 169 254 150 81 2 00 2420 Axon L3 User Objects tan Axon Two 169 254 179 247 2 0 0 2420 Axon 5 C Shock Media ui 12 Awon Three 169 254 249 89 2 00 2420 Axon L3 Stock Objects Mwj DiX12 169 254 254 74 2 00 2420 DLX2 BB DL mee 3 BHL User Media E User Objects ee 074 0 01 Xa You can also view the installed software versions by navigating to the I nfo Version screen of a Software Version 20 0 2379 DLHD fixture s menu system Firmware Version 154150 Windows XPe 220 Pan Encd Version 10 Tilt Encd Version 1 0 Unique ID 92902AA1 Fixture Name DL3one IP Address 169 254 153 131 For downloading and upgrading CMA or fixture software see Upgrading Software on page 274 DLHD Digital Light User Manual 15 CHAPTER 2 Setup and Configuration Configuring DUHD Fixtures Before programming the DLHD fixtures from a DMX5
296. ware on servers is not prohibited it is highly recommended that all servers on the network be running the same software version Upgrading the CMA Software Close the CMA before upgrading the CMA software To Upgrade software 1 Download the latest version of the application from the Support section of the High End Systems website ww w highend com A download wizard simplifies installation on your personal computer 2 A dialog box will give you the option to Run or Save the application Pressing Run automatically uninstalls any existing CMA version on your hard drive and installs the new version Upgrading Server Software The server software for Digital Lights and Axon media servers can only be uploaded to fixtures from the CMA You must first save the latest version of the software from the High End Systems website www higahend com to your hard drive and then use the CMA to upload it to any media server on your link To Upgrade Server Software 1 Using your internet browser select the latest version from the support section of the High End Systems website A dialog box will give you the option to Save 2 Select the location and press Save again to put a copy of the Fixture software on your local drive DLHD Digital Light User Manual 231 CHAPTER 15 Content Management Application CMA 3 Click on All Servers in the left pane of the CMA Window High End Systems Content Management Application File Servers Help
297. you to cycle a color sequence on the background controlling the transition speed Modifier 1 Defines the red color component speed A DMX value of 128 5096 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 10096 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a backward direction to O fastest change speed Modifier 2 Defines the green color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a backward direction to O fastest change speed Modifier 3 Defines the blue color component speed A DMX value of 128 50 default cycle speed DMX Values above the midpoint increase cycle speed in a forward direction to 255 100 fastest change speed DMX values below the midpoint increase cycle speed in a backward direction to O fastest change speed DLHD Digital Light User Manual 109 CHAPTER 13 Effect Mode Options Descriptions M Object Effect Global Effect Effect Mode parameter DMX value 1 This parameter simulates CMY color by inverting RGB color components Use this parameter when you want to color mix with a CMY color model instead of RGB color model Modifier 1 Increases cyan color component from 0 no adjustment to 255 100 maximum cyan saturation Modif
298. zero will place the four corners of the image at the four corners of the projector output Adjusting framing x values across 255 100 clips the image from the selected x corner position horizontally toward the image Adjusting keystone y values toward 255 100 clips the image from the selected y corner position vertically across the image 96 DLHD Digital Light User Manual Chapter le Global Functions Collage Generator This chapter describes how to display content from multiple media servers in panoramic arrays and includes an example for creating a collage Collage Overview Collage Generator technology allows you to create virtually seamless panoramic media projections controlled from your DMX console You can display either stock or custom content The Axon HD version of the Collage Generator has streamlined this process The Collage Generator is no longer a part of Global Effects but is defined using dedicated parameters You can configure multiple media server outputs to display a single image in arrays up to 16 units horizontal by 8 units vertical using DL fixtures or Axon media servers outputting to Orbital Head fixtures or other digital projectors NOTE When using third party projectors you will need to position output manually The native aspect ratio of one DL fixture or Axon media server output is 4 3 Some of the arrays configured in conjunction with the Collage Generator will output a different overall asp

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Extron electronic Extron Electronics Webcam RGB 304 User's Manual  詳細取扱説明書  日本語 - SMC株式会社  - Universität Klagenfurt  MANUAL DEL USUARIO – UDIA SISTEMA DE GESTION DE  manuale dell`utente gcv135e·gcv160e  Web_XWDJ1-G-1A - Support  T4P/T5P User`s Manual  クリップライ ト取扱説明書  Service manual Multi Concept MX-Chassis  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file